JP2021129792A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing a decrease in interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine displays imparted quantity display regarding an imparted quantity of a game value imparted by entry of a game medium into variable winning means at a lapse of a predetermined period after the variable winning means is changed from a second state to a first state when a round game is performed. Suggestive performance execution means can execute a performance for further decreasing visibility to a second low-visibility state lower than a first low-visibility state after temporarily decreasing visibility of performance identification information differing from specific performance identification information to the first low-visibility state by display of effective display as a suggestive performance, informing performance execution means can execute a performance for preventing the performance identification information differing from the specific performance identification information from being recognized visually as an informing performance, and suggestive performance execution means can execute a suggestive performance even if the specific performance identification information is not stopped temporarily, and can continue to display effective display during a predetermined period after predetermined timing when the specific performance identification information is not stopped temporarily.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-11

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

As a gaming machine, when a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is launched into the gaming area by a launching device, the gaming medium wins a prize in a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the gaming area, and an execution condition (starting condition) is satisfied. Pachinko that enhances the interest of the game by a so-called variable display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (hereinafter referred to as display symbols) are variably displayed on a variable display device and whether or not to give a predetermined game value is determined based on the display result. There is a game machine. In such a pachinko gaming machine, when the stop symbol mode when the variable display of the display symbol in the variable display game is completely stopped becomes the specific display mode, the pachinko gaming machine becomes an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. In the big hit game state, the round game in which the big winning opening is open can be repeatedly executed up to a predetermined upper limit number of times.

As such a gaming machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the opening of the large winning opening is earlier than the timing of switching the display of the number of rounds (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2017-104625

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, although the possibility of winning a prize in the large winning opening is increased when the gaming medium is fired before the number of rounds is displayed, the number of balls to be obtained is preferably obtained. From the viewpoint of displaying the game, it is still not sufficient, and there is a risk that the player may feel uneasy and the game interest may be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a decline in the interest in gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention
A plurality of types of effect identification information (for example, decorative symbols) including specific effect identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous symbols) are variably displayed to derive and display the display result, which is an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a state) (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
Display means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for instructing the display contents on the image display device 5) and
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing the game medium into a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win.
A control means (for example, a control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. CPU103 that performs round games, etc.)
The display means
It is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions).
When the first round game of the plurality of round games is performed, the grant amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period has passed after the big winning opening is opened),
If the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, the number of acquisitions). Display "0000" as a display, etc.),
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the specific display is displayed without displaying the predetermined display (for example, "0015" is displayed instead of displaying "0000").
Moreover,
As the variable display, the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result, and then the variable display is restarted (for example, a pseudo-ream). A specific effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13) that can execute the effect).
The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the temporary stop suggestion effect) suggesting that the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. The part to do) and
The notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the notification effect (for example, the temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the specific effect identification information has been temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. The part to do) and
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means temporarily reduces the visibility of the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the first low visibility. It is possible to execute an effect of lowering the visibility to the second low visibility state, which is even lower than the state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-33 and 14-34, in the image display device 5, the concentration line is set to the density D1. After reducing the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols by displaying them, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D2),
As the notification effect, the notification effect executing means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35). , The part that makes the left and right decorative symbols invisible by displaying the effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-44, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped by executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest without giving anxiety to the player. Further, the suggestion effect can increase the player's expectation for the temporary stop, and the notification effect can be executed to increase the uplifting feeling for the temporary stop. Since the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop has not been performed, and the player's disappointment for not having the temporary stop can be alleviated. Because you will be able to play, you can improve the game fun.

In order to achieve the above objectives, other gaming machines
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by variably displaying a plurality of types of effect identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) to derive and display the display result. Machine 1)
Display means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for instructing the display contents on the image display device 5) and
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing the game medium into a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win.
A control means (for example, a control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. CPU103 that performs round games, etc.)
The display means
It is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions).
When the first round game of the plurality of round games is performed, the grant amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period has passed after the big winning opening is opened),
If the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, the number of acquisitions). Display "0000" as a display, etc.),
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display. Etc.),
Moreover,
As a variable display, special identification information (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol) different from the effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result. A specific effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 13) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) that resumes the variable display later.
The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the temporary stop suggestion effect) suggesting that the special identification information is temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. Part) and
The notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the notification effect (for example, the temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the special identification information has been temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. Part) and
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect executing means once reduces the visibility of the effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the visibility is further improved as compared with the first low visibility state. It is possible to execute an effect of lowering the second low visibility state to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-33 and 14-34, by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D1 in the image display device 5, the left and right are displayed. A part that further reduces the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D2 after reducing the visibility of the decorative patterns),
The notification effect execution means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification. Is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is continued for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. It can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-44, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest without giving anxiety to the player. Further, the suggestion effect can increase the player's expectation for the temporary stop, and the notification effect can be executed to increase the uplifting feeling for the temporary stop. Since the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop has not been performed, and the player's disappointment for not having the temporary stop can be alleviated. Because you will be able to play, you can improve the game fun.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following means A to B. Conventionally, it is possible to execute a variable display of a decorative symbol (effect identification information) as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-131876 in a gaming machine, and a pseudo-continuous symbol (specification) is performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. There are some that can execute a pseudo continuous effect (specific effect) including a temporary stop of the effect identification information) and a revariable display.

However, since no effect is executed when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, it is not possible to raise the player's expectation that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. There is a problem that the uplifting feeling of the player cannot be enhanced.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the expectation of a player and enhancing the uplifting feeling of a player. ..

The gaming machine of means A is
A plurality of types of effect identification information (for example, decorative symbols) including specific effect identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous symbols) are variably displayed to derive and display the display result, which is an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a state) (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
As the variable display, the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result, and then the variable display is restarted (for example, a pseudo-ream). A specific effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13) that can execute the effect).
The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the temporary stop suggestion effect) suggesting that the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. The part to do) and
The notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the notification effect (for example, the temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the specific effect identification information has been temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. The part to do) and
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means temporarily reduces the visibility of the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the first low visibility. It is possible to execute an effect of lowering the visibility to the second low visibility state, which is even lower than the state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-33 and 14-34, in the image display device 5, the concentration line is set to the density D1. After reducing the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols by displaying them, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D2),
As the notification effect, the notification effect executing means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35). , The part that makes the left and right decorative symbols invisible by displaying the effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-44, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped by executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestion effect, and it is possible to increase the uplifting feeling for the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and also to temporarily stop. If not, the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, so that the player can easily recognize that the temporary stop has not been performed, and the player is disappointed that the temporary stop has not been performed. Since the feeling can be softened, the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of means B is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by variably displaying a plurality of types of effect identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) to derive and display the display result. Machine 1)
As a variable display, special identification information (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol) different from the effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result. A specific effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 13) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) that resumes the variable display later.
The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the temporary stop suggestion effect) suggesting that the special identification information is temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. Part) and
The notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the notification effect (for example, the temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the special identification information has been temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. Part) and
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect executing means once reduces the visibility of the effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the visibility is further improved as compared with the first low visibility state. It is possible to execute an effect of lowering the second low visibility state to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-33 and 14-34, by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D1 in the image display device 5, the left and right are displayed. A part that further reduces the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D2 after reducing the visibility of the decorative patterns),
The notification effect execution means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification. Is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is continued for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. It can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-44, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestion effect, and it is possible to increase the uplifting feeling for the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and also to temporarily stop. If not, the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, so that the player can easily recognize that the temporary stop has not been performed, and the player is disappointed that the temporary stop has not been performed. Since the feeling can be softened, the game entertainment can be improved.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a figure which shows the lighting example of a game effect lamp. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of various display processing. It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows an example of the state which a game ball is sandwiched by a special variable winning ball device. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. It is a flowchart which shows an example of various display processing. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the effect operation display example in an image display device, the open / closed state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of the jackpot and the numerical range of the time saving loss in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the operation of the 2nd movable body. It is explanatory drawing of the image data which constitutes the display in an image display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing of the image data which constitutes the display in an image display apparatus. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning prize determination processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random number value determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing the content of a variable category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. This is a part of the flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the read-ahead notice setting process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display pattern determination ratio for a jackpot hold memory, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display pattern determination ratio for a lost hold memory. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. This is a variable display timing chart that executes a pseudo-continuous effect. This is a variable display timing chart that executes a pseudo-continuous effect. This is a variable display timing chart that executes a pseudo-continuous effect. This is a variable display timing chart that executes a pseudo-continuous effect. This is a variable display timing chart that executes a pseudo-continuous effect. It is explanatory drawing of each production period and production content in pseudo-continuous production. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process (for executing the pseudo continuous effect), and (B) is a diagram showing the presence / absence of execution of the advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the advance notice effect to be executed. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process (for non-execution of the pseudo continuous effect), and (B) is a diagram showing the presence / absence of execution of the advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the advance notice effect to be executed. (A) is a diagram showing a special temporary stop notification effect execution decision ratio, and (B) is a diagram showing a temporary stop notification effect period determination ratio. It is a figure which shows the output mode of the sound output from a speaker. It is a figure which shows the display mode of each image in the temporary stop suggestion effect period when the pseudo-continuous symbol is non-stop. It is a figure which shows the display mode of each image in the temporary stop suggestion effect period when the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is explanatory drawing of the change of the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols in the temporary stop suggestion effect period and the temporary stop notification effect period. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes the pseudo continuous effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the image data which constitutes the display in an image display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing of the image data which constitutes the display in an image display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing of the image data which constitutes the display in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is explanatory drawing of the image data which constitutes the display in the image display apparatus in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes the pseudo continuous effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes the pseudo continuous effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes the pseudo continuous effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes the pseudo continuous effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transparency of a concentrated line and an effect image in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes the pseudo continuous effect in the modification.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening that is always maintained in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. As shown in the figure, the frame lamp 9b includes a lower left lamp 9bL1 in a lower left portion, an upper left lamp 9bL2 in an upper left portion, a lower right lamp 9bR1 in a lower right portion, and an upper right lamp 9bR2 in an upper right portion. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. Further, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR are provided in the speakers 8L and 8R portions corresponding to the speakers 8L and 8R, respectively. A display device lower lamp 9f is provided at a position below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, and the display device lower lamp 9f includes a left side display device lower lamp 9fL and a right side display device lower lamp 9fR as shown in the figure. There is. Further, 9 g of lamps in the vicinity of the general winning opening are provided in the vicinity of the general winning opening 10 provided at three locations on the lower left side of the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. When the movable body lamp 9d, the above-mentioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, speaker lamp 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f, and general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. There is. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, the display device lower lamp 9f, and the general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g are configured to include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a ball output rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ream ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning a prize to the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (although the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29.5 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until one of the earlier timings. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player. In the big hit game state, a so-called right-handed hit that launches the game ball into the game area on the right side may be performed so that the game ball is won in the big prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls are obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). If the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which a conductor pattern is formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electric components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 by a power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The reset signal, power cutoff signal, and clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting the control circuit of the game control microcomputer 100 or the like into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of the power supply monitoring circuit, the watchdog timer built-in IC, and the system reset IC. All you need is. The power off signal is turned off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and is turned on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage is below the predetermined value continues for the power interruption reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output voice) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the symbol can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process of step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stopped state different from the lost symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the setting change state, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the amusement park or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process in step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold memories, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Be told. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination values to be compared with the random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a configuration in which the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability and the ball output rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. .. If the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the ball output rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 7A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 7B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of the figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are displayed as a special figure of "big hit". Assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, there is a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the low-probability state such as the normal state or the time-saving state. It gets higher.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, it is determined that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. A value has been assigned. In the display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is the display result for the first special figure regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that they have the same value as the judgment table. It should be noted that the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be different according to the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and while only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, the set value 2 to the set value 6 In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit", so that only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (in order to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 8 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when receiving an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process "7" in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the jackpot game state. Update to "" and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 042AK)
Next, the gaming machine in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-21. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment starts displaying the number of balls acquired after a predetermined period in which the attacker is in the open state in the first round game, and the attacker wins a prize within the predetermined period. If not, a predetermined display indicating that the number of balls won has not increased is displayed, and if the attacker wins a prize within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 042AK having such features will be described. The same parts as those described in the above basic explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, which includes a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d. , Speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left side display device lower lamp 9fL, right side display device lower lamp 9fR), general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g, and other game effect lamps 9 are all turned on. It is a figure. In the feature portion 042AK of the present embodiment, which will be described in detail later, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d , Speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left side display device lower lamp 9fL, right side display device lower lamp 9fR), game effect lamp 9 such as general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g, lights in sequence from lower left to lower right. It is possible to suggest to the player that he should hit right.

FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 10-2, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001; Yes), the effect waiting time at the start of the jackpot is set (step 042AKS002). For example, in the process of step 042AKS002, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the effect waiting time at the start of the big hit may be set in the game control process timer provided in the RAM 102.

Following the process of step 042AKS002, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step 042AKS003). For example, in the process of step 042AKS003, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command is the buffer area designated by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. It should be stored in. After that, the jackpot flag is cleared to turn it off (step 042AKS004). In addition, a setting for ending the probability change state and the time saving state is made (step 042AKS005). For example, in step 042AKS005, a process of clearing the probability change flag and the time saving flag to turn off the state, a process of clearing the special figure fluctuation counter for counting the number of executions of the special figure game in the probability change state and the time saving state, and the like are performed. It should be executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4", which is a value corresponding to the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening (step 042AKS006), the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

If the big hit flag is off in step 042AKS001 (step 042AKS001; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step 042AKS007). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step 042AKS007; No), the effect waiting time at the start of the small hit is set (step 042AKS008). For example, in the process of step 042AKS008, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the effect waiting time at the start of the small hit may be set in the game control process timer.

Following the process of step 042AKS008, the setting for transmitting the hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is made in the same manner as the process of step 042AKS003 (step 042AKS009). After that, the small hit flag is cleared to turn it off (step 042AKS010). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8", which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step 042AKS011).

If the small hit flag is off in step 042AKS007 (step 042AKS007; No), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 042AKS012). .. After executing any of the processes of step 042AKS011 and step 042AKS012, it is determined whether or not to end the probability change state or the time saving state (step 042AKS013). For example, in the process of step 042AKS003, the value of the special figure fluctuation count counter (special figure fluctuation count value) is updated by, for example, 1 subtraction or 1 addition, and the updated special figure fluctuation count value is predetermined. It is determined whether or not it matches the special game state end determination value. At this time, if it matches the special game state end determination value, the probability change state or the time reduction state may be ended and the normal state may be controlled by clearing the probability change flag or the time reduction flag to turn it off. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end determination value, the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag may be maintained, and the process of step 042AKS013 may be completed. After executing the end determination of the probability change state or the time saving state, the special symbol stop process ends. It should be noted that the end determination based on the special figure fluctuation count value may be performed only when the time is shortened, and the probability variation state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit". .. Alternatively, for example, the probability change state is terminated by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the probability change state end from a random counter provided in the RAM 102 and referring to the probability change state end determination table previously stored in the ROM 101 or the like. It may be decided whether or not to do so.

FIG. 10-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S114 of FIG. 6 as the big hit opening pre-process. In the jackpot opening preprocessing shown in FIG. 10-3, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot start flag is on (step 042AKS021). Here, the jackpot start flag is set to the on state in the special symbol stop process of step S113 shown in FIG. 6 in response to the jackpot flag being on. If the jackpot start flag is on in step 042AKS021 (step 042AKS021; Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot start effect is waiting (step 042AKS022). As an example, in the special symbol stop process in step S113 shown in FIG. 3, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the effect waiting time at the start of the jackpot is set. Set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S312, it is determined that the jackpot start effect is waiting in response to the fact that the game control process timer value does not match the predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value (for example, "0"). , Corresponding to the match, it may be determined that the production is not waiting at the start of the big hit.

If the jackpot start effect is waiting in step 042AKS022, step 042AKS022; Yes), for example, after updating by subtracting 1 from the game control process timer value (step 042AKS023), the jackpot opening pre-processing ends. On the other hand, if the jackpot start production is not waiting in step 042AKS022 (step 042AKS022; No), the jackpot start flag is cleared (step 042AKS024), and the jackpot opening count counter is cleared. (Step 042AKS025), the jackpot type buffer value stored in the RAM 102 is read out (step 042AKS026), and the release control pattern corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value is set. In the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, a common open control pattern is set regardless of the jackpot type. For example, when there is a jackpot type of "probability", a jackpot of "probability change" or "non-probability change" It may be set to an open control pattern different from the type. Further, even if the jackpot type is "probability variation" or "non-probability variation", different opening control patterns are set depending on the jackpot type, for example, the jackpot type of "probability variation 1" and "probability variation 2" are set to different opening control patterns. It may be set in a pattern.

After executing the process of step 042AKS026, it is determined whether or not the player is waiting for opening the large winning opening in the next round (waiting for the next opening) (step 042AKS027). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS027, it is determined whether or not the game control process timer value matches the next open waiting end determination value, and if it does not match, it is determined that the next open wait end is in progress, but if they match. If this is the case, it may be determined that the device is not waiting for opening next time. If the next opening standby is in step 042AKS027 (step 042AKS027; Yes), the process proceeds to step 042AKS023 to update the game control process timer value. The game control process timer value updated in step 042AKS023 is the time set as the waiting time at the start of the jackpot in step 042AKS002 shown in FIG. 10-2, or the post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 of FIG. This is the time set as the interval time between each round.

If it is determined in step 042AKS027 that the next opening is not waiting (step 042AKS027; No), the large winning opening is opened according to the set opening control pattern and the count value in the large winning opening opening counter. (Step 042AKS028). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS028, a large prize formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed by setting a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the large winning opening opening time in the game control process timer. The large winning opening time, which is the upper limit of the time for opening the mouth, is set. Further, for example, the solenoid drive signal for the predetermined large winning opening door is started to be output via the predetermined solenoid circuit, so that the large winning opening door solenoid for opening the large winning opening is turned on. The state is set.

At this time, for example, when the count value in the large winning opening opening counter is any of "1" to "15", the timer initial value corresponding to 29.5 seconds as the large winning opening opening time is the game control process timer. Is set to.

Then, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS029). After executing the process of step 042AKS029, the value of the special figure process flag is updated by adding 1 to the count value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened (step 042AKS030), and the value of the special figure process flag is a value corresponding to the process during the opening of the big hit. After updating to 5 ”(step 042AKS031), the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening is completed.

FIG. 10-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S115 of FIG. 6 as the process during the opening of the jackpot. In the process during the jackpot opening shown in FIG. 10-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the game ball has been won in the jackpot by, for example, determining whether or not the count switch 23 has been turned on. (Step 042AKS041). If there is no winning of the game ball in the large winning opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS044.

On the other hand, if there is a winning of the game ball to the big winning opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; Yes), the CPU 103 updates by adding 1 to the winning number count value, and the game ball is the big winning opening. A setting is made to transmit a prize designation command indicating that a prize has been won from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS042). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the updated winning number count value is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 042AKS043). If the winning number count value is not a predetermined number (step 042AKS043; No), after the game control process timer value is subtracted by 1 and updated (step 042AKS044), for example, the game control process timer value corresponds to 29.5 seconds. It is determined whether or not 29.5 seconds have passed since the large winning opening was opened, depending on whether or not the timer value is matched (step 042AKS045). At this time, if 29.5 seconds have not elapsed (step 042AKS045; No), the process of opening the large winning opening is terminated as it is.

When it is determined in step 042AKS043 that the updated winning number count value is a predetermined number (step 042AKS043; Yes), or 29.5 seconds have passed since the large winning opening was opened in step 042AKS045. When it is determined (step 042AKS043; Yes), for example, the output of the solenoid drive signal to the predetermined solenoid for the winning opening door is stopped via the predetermined solenoid circuit to close the winning opening. The solenoid for the large winning opening door is set to be turned off (step 042AKS046), and the winning number count value is cleared (step 042AKS047).

After executing the process of step 042AKS047, the setting for transmitting the designated command after opening the large winning opening is made to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS048), and the value of the special figure process flag is set after opening the large winning opening. After updating to "6", which is a value corresponding to the processing (step 042AKS049), the processing during the jackpot opening is terminated.

In this way, the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 10-2, the jackpot opening pre-processing shown in FIG. 10-3, the jackpot opening processing shown in FIG. 10-4, etc. (including the jackpot opening post-processing and the jackpot end processing). Is executed to set transmission of various effect control commands such as a winning start designation command, a large winning opening open designation command, a winning designation command, and a large winning opening post-opening designation command. Then, the command control process of step S27 in FIG. 5 is executed, and the effect control command set to be transmitted is transmitted to the control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12, so that the effect control board 12 side , The timing of each timing such as the start of the big hit, the opening and closing of the big winning opening (start of the round) and the closing (the end of the round), the winning of the big winning opening and the end of the big hit, etc. is grasped.

FIG. 10-5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing performed in the jackpot middle effect processing of step S176 of FIG. 9 as various display processing. In the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-5, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a hit end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051). When it is determined in the big hit opening post-processing of step S116 of FIG. 6 that the number of executions of the round that opens the big winning opening has reached the set upper limit execution number, the hit end designation command is executed on the main board. It is a command transmitted from the side of 11, and is a command for ending the big hit middle effect and executing the ending effect.

When it is determined that the hit end designation command has not been received (step 042AKS051; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the nR (the nR predetermined period has elapsed). Determine (step 042AKS052). Note that n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and the initial value is set to "1", which is sequentially added by 1 in the process of step 042AKS066 described later, and cleared to "1" in step 042AKS066. The predetermined period is 0.6 seconds, which is set as a timer value at the start of the round game, and when the timer value becomes "0", it may be determined that the predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the nR round. More specifically, from the side of the main board 11 in response to the fact that the big prize opening is completely open (it is detected that the big winning door has moved to the position where it is completely open). The designated command during the opening of the large winning opening is transmitted, and the timer value for a predetermined period may be counted from the timing when the command is received.

In addition, in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, as will be described later, after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the round game of the first round, the number of acquired balls is displayed and the number of rounds is indicated. The display is done. On the side of the production control board 12, the number of acquisitions is obtained each time a winning designation command indicating that the game ball has won a prize is received in the big winning opening during the period from the big hit to the end (the period from the fanfare to the ending). Is continuously added by 15. When the effect control board 12 receives the prize designation command, it is necessary to first analyze the command, add the number of acquisitions, and display the added number of acquisitions. It takes a predetermined period to display. Therefore, if the predetermined period is too short, the series of processes will not be in time for the winning from the start of the round game of the first round until the predetermined period elapses, and "0000" will be displayed as the number of acquisitions. , The process of displaying "0015" may not catch up even though the prize is won (it becomes "0015" after "0000" is displayed, which gives the player a sense of discomfort). Therefore, in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, when a predetermined period of 0.6 seconds is provided and the game ball existing at the upper part of the large winning opening at the opening timing wins a prize from the opening until the number of rounds is displayed. In addition, a period in which "0015" is directly displayed without displaying "0000" as the number of acquisitions is secured. On the other hand, in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, the predetermined period is set to 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval when continuously firing, and the period from firing to winning the grand prize opening is set. Even if it is taken into consideration, the time interval required for the continuously fired game balls to win a prize in the large winning opening is the firing interval. Therefore, the number of winnings in the large winning opening is one from the opening of the large winning opening to the display of the number of winnings. Therefore, by increasing the number of winnings in the state before the number of acquisitions and the number of rounds are displayed, it is possible to prevent the number of acquisitions from being displayed at the timing when the number of rounds is displayed and to give the player a sense of discomfort. can do. Although the predetermined period in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment is 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval, the predetermined period is not limited to 0.6 seconds and may be changed as appropriate.

When it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the start of the nR (step 042AKS052; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not n = 1, that is, whether or not it is the first round. Determine (step 042AKS053). n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, which is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As described above, the initial value is set to "1", and 1 is sequentially added in the process of step 042AKS066, and "1" is added in step 042AKS068. Cleared to. In the process of step 042AKS053, it is determined whether or not n = 1 by confirming the value of n.

When it is determined that n = 1 (step 042AKS053; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs a right-handed effect suggesting that the player should hit right, and suggests that the player is in a big hit game state. The operation of the fanfare effect is controlled (step 042AKS054). On the other hand, when it is determined that n ≠ 1 (step 042AKS053; No), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n-1R, displays the number of acquisitions, and displays the number of acquisitions, and the n-1R. (Step 042AKS055). In the process of step 042AKS055, for example, when n = 2, the round display indicating that it is the first round and the number of acquisitions are displayed, and the operation control of the big hit middle effect corresponding to the first round is performed. In the process of step 042AKS055, as a jackpot effect, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the jackpot effect, and a predetermined song or sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It suffices if the production of outputting is performed. The light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot production may be set in advance.

After executing the process of step 042AKS054 or step 042AKS055, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning designation command has been received, that is, whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening (step 042AKS056). In the process of step 042AKS056, the winning is determined from the start of the nR to the predetermined period. When the winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends various display processes as it is.

When the winning designation command is received, that is, when the winning opening is won by the predetermined period from the start of the nR (step 042AKS056; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 counts the number of winning balls. Is added by "15" (step 042AKS057). The count value of the number of acquired balls is stored in advance in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 with an initial value of "0", and "15" is added by the process of step 042AKS057 or the process of step 042AKS063 described later. The number of balls won is continuously counted during the so-called consecutive villa, and is cleared to "0" at the timing when the time saving control ends without the variable display result becoming a "big hit", that is, at the end timing of the consecutive villa. .. After executing the process of step 042AKS057, the effect control CPU 120 causes the attacker lamp 9c to emit light and outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning (step 042AKS058). The light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 (the same applies to step 042AKS064) is, for example, more than the number of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emits light during the big hit production (winning prize). It emits light in an aspect of notifying that it has been done. Therefore, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and the game interest can be improved. As for the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c, the number of light emission per unit time may be larger at the time of winning and at the time of producing during the big hit. When a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening, the attacker lamp 9c is made to emit light regardless of whether or not the winning is within a predetermined period, and a winning sound is output. Therefore, it becomes easy to recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and the game interest can be improved.

After executing the process of step 042AKS058, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not n = 1, that is, whether or not it is the first round (1st R), as in step 042AKS053 (step 042AKS059). ). If n = 1, that is, if it is the first round (step 042AKS059; Yes), the various display processes are terminated as they are. On the other hand, if n ≠ 1, that is, if it is not the first round (step 042AKS059; No), the count value of the number of acquired balls added in step 042AKS057 is displayed (the number of acquired balls is displayed), and the number of acquired balls is displayed. After the update display (step 042AKS060), various display processes are terminated. In addition, in the feature unit 042AK of the present embodiment, when the acquired number update display is performed in the process of step 042AKS060, the count value of the acquired number of balls added in step 042AKS057 is not displayed as it is, but is shown in FIG. 10-. As shown in 12 (a-23), the count-up display (notification display indicating that the number of acquisitions is increasing) is performed, and then the number of acquisitions is displayed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the number of balls to be acquired increases, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When it is determined in step 042AKS052 of FIG. 10-5 that a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the nR (step 042AKS052; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the nR and the number of acquisitions. And, at the same time, the operation control of the effect during the big hit of the nR is performed (step 042AKS061). When n = 1, that is, in the case of the first round, the number of rounds and the number of acquisitions are displayed for the first time in step 042AKS061. In this case, if there is a prize before the elapse of the predetermined period, the number of acquisitions is updated and displayed in the step 042AKS061. Specifically, if a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening before the lapse of a predetermined period, the number of acquisitions is added by "15" in step 042AKS057. Therefore, in step 042AKS061, FIG. 10-11 (a-20). ) Is displayed to count up (notification display that the number of acquisitions is increasing), and then as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-21), the number of acquisitions has not increased in this big hit. The number of acquisitions (as a specific display) is displayed (display of "0015"), which is different from the predetermined display indicating You can do it after the upload). On the other hand, if the game ball has not won the big prize opening before the lapse of the predetermined period, the number of winnings remains "0" and the number of winnings has not increased in this big hit. Therefore, FIG. 10-11 (a) As shown in -22), as a predetermined display, the number of acquisitions (display of "0000") indicating that the number of acquisitions has not increased is displayed (if it is in a consecutive villa, the number of acquisitions at the time of the previous big hit remains the same. You can display it). In addition to "0000" as the display of the number of acquisitions (predetermined display) indicating that the number of acquisitions has not increased, a display other than a number such as "---" or "not increased" is performed. You may do so. Further, in step 042AKS061, as a jackpot effect, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the jackpot effect, and predetermined music and sound are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It suffices if the production of outputting is performed. The light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot production may be set in advance. In this way, during the predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened, that is, in the situation where the number of winnings is not displayed, only the attacker lamp 9c lights up when the game ball wins the large winning opening. However, in the situation where the number of acquisitions after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed, the effect lamp 9 provided on the frame 3 for the double-game machine and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately alternated. Is turned on, and more effect lamps 9 are emitted than during a predetermined period. Therefore, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and after the number of acquisitions after the predetermined period is displayed. The production can be lively and the game entertainment can be improved. Further, since the effect lamp 9 is emitted at the same timing as the execution timing of the big hit middle effect, the effect can be excited at once at the timing when the big hit medium effect is executed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

After executing the process of step 042AKS061, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning designation command has been received, that is, whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening (step 042AKS062). When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the big winning opening (step 042AKS062; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "15" to the count value of the number of acquired balls (step 042AKS063). The attacker playing card 9c is made to emit light, the winning sound corresponding to the winning is output, the count-up is displayed (notification display that the number of acquisitions is increasing), and then the number of acquisitions is displayed. The number of acquisitions is updated. (Step 042AKS064).

After executing the process of step 042AKS064, or when the prize designation command is not received in step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), has the effect control CPU 120 started the next round of the nR, the n + 1R? It is determined whether or not (step 042AKS065). In step 042AKS065, for example, it may be determined whether or not a designated command during opening of the large winning opening indicating the start of the n + 1R is received from the side of the main board 11. When the n + 1R has not started, that is, when the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening has not been received and the nR remains (step 042AKS065; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends various display processes as it is. .. On the other hand, when the n + 1R starts, that is, when a designated command indicating the start of the n + 1R is received (step 042AKS065; Yes), after adding n by "1" (step 042AKS066), various display processes To finish. For example, when n = 1, that is, in the first round, n = 2 in step 042AKS066. Although n = 2 and the second round, until the predetermined period elapses, it is determined as No in steps 042AKS052 and 053, and in step 042AKS055, it corresponds to the first round which is the n-1R. The round display is performed, and after the lapse of a predetermined period, the round display corresponding to the second round, which is the nR, is performed (after being determined as Yes in step 042AKS052, it is displayed in the process of step 042AKS061).

When it is determined in step 042AKS051 that the hit end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets to end the big hit middle effect corresponding to the round in order to perform the ending effect (step 042AKS051). 042AKS067), clear n to 1 (step 042AKS068), and end various display processes.

Subsequently, display timings such as round number display and acquisition number display and examples of effect operations will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 10-6 to 10-14. In the illustrated example, the case of the so-called first hit (first big hit) is shown, not in the consecutive villas.

FIG. 10-6 is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the large winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. 10-7 to 10-14 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation display in the image display device 5, an open / closed state of a large winning opening, and a lighting state of various lamps. As shown in FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7 (a-1), when the combination of the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game state is reached. At this stage, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (b-1), the large winning opening is closed. Further, in order to notify the player that a big hit has occurred, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-1), the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the speaker lamp 9eL, Various effect lamps 9 such as 9eR, the lower lamp 9f of the display device, and the general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g are turned on. In the illustrated example, the upper stage is the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3, and the lower stage is the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2.

When it becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-6, a right-handed effect and a fanfare effect are performed to notify the player that the player should hit right until the predetermined period of the first round ends (Fig. 10-). Step 042AKS054) of step 5. The period from the jackpot shown in FIG. 10-6 to the start of the first R is a sufficiently longer period than the predetermined period. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-2), the effect image of the fanfare is displayed on the image display device 5, and at the same time, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-2). All effect lamps 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, the effect lamp 9 is turned on in the order of the lower left side, the upper left side, the central portion, the upper right side, and the lower right side, and the right-handed effect of displaying "right-handed" on the image display device is performed. The small right-handed display displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-2) may be continuously displayed during the big hit game state.

Specifically, in the right-handed effect, as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (a-3) to 10-10 (a-19), in the image display device 5, the "right-handed" image is superimposed on the fanfare image. The display continues. Therefore, the lighting order of the effect lamp 9 will be described below. When the right-handed effect is started, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-3), the general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g provided at the lower left of the game area is first lit, and then FIG. 10-7 (Fig. 10-7 (c-3). As shown in c-4), the lower left lamp 9bL1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower left portion, lights up. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-5), of the display device lower lamps 9f provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 on the game board 2, the left side display device lower lamp 9fL is lit, and then the left side display device lower lamp 9fL is turned on. As shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-6), the upper left lamp 9bL2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper left portion, lights up, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-7), the speaker lamp corresponding to the speaker 8L portion. 9eL lights up. In this way, the effect lamps 9 are turned on in order from the lower left side to the upper left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (b-7), since the large winning opening is closed, the launched game medium does not win the large winning opening at this stage. In the example shown in FIG. 10-8 (b-7), the launched game ball passes through the second path of the upper part of the grand prize opening door and is guided to the discharge path.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-8), the movable body lamp 9d corresponding to the movable body 32 provided in the upper center portion of the game board 2 is turned on, and FIG. 10-8 (c-9). ), The main lamp 9 located above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3 is lit, so that the effect lamp 9 provided in the upper center portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is lit.

Next, the speaker lamp 9eR corresponding to the speaker 8R portion is turned on as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-10), and then the frame lamp in the upper right portion is lit as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-11). The upper right lamp 9bR2, which is 9, lights up, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-12), the right display device of the display device lower lamp 9f provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 on the game board 2. The lower lamp 9fR lights up. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-13), the lower right lamp 9bR1 which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower right part is lit, and the attacker lamp 9c provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 is lit. do. In this way, the effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, the effect lamp 9 lights up in order from the lower left side to the upper left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the central part, and then from the upper right side to the lower right side, so that the effect lamp 9 hits the player right. Right-handed production will be performed to suggest. In this example, an example is shown in which both the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are used to suggest right-handed striking. It may be. Further, only the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 lights from the lower left side to the center and the lower right side, and only the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 lights from the lower left side to the center and right. Both may be lit independently at the same time or with a time lag, such as lighting in the downward direction.

After the right-handed effect of the effect lamps 9 is completed, all the effect lamps 9 are turned off as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). As shown in FIG. 10-9 (a-15), the right-handed display on the image display device 5 is continuously performed (the right-handed effect itself is being executed).

Next, when the opening timing of the large winning opening is reached as shown in FIG. 10-6, the first R is started, and the large winning opening is opened as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16). At this stage, right-handed display on the image display device 5 is continuously performed as shown in FIG. 10-10 (a-16), and is shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-16) until a predetermined period elapses. As such, all effect lamps 9 remain off (same until FIGS. 10-10 (a-19) and (c-19)). Even if all the effect lamps 9 are not turned off, any of the indexes such as luminous intensity, brightness, and illuminance may be set to be lower than usual. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16), even after the large winning opening is opened, until a predetermined period elapses, FIGS. 10-7 (c-3) to 10-9. As shown in (c-13), the effect lamps 9 may be turned on in sequence to suggest right-handed strikes. In this case, the lighting speed of each effect lamp may be faster than before the opening of the big winning opening (the lighting period may be shortened and the transition speed may be faster). Further, when the effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on after the large winning opening is opened to suggest a right-handed strike, after the last lit attacker lamp 9c is turned on, it is shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). You may leave it on as it is without turning it off. According to this, the player can be made aware that the big winning opening is open.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-17), when the large winning opening is completely opened, the count of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period corresponding to the first R is started, and FIG. 10-10 When the game ball wins the large winning opening as shown in (b-18), the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, and the winning designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side. It should be noted that the large winning opening is also open for the game ball (early hit game ball) launched by performing the right-handed effect before the first R is started (before the large winning opening is opened). If it exists in the upper part of the large winning opening at the timing, it becomes possible to win a prize within a predetermined period corresponding to the first R. On the side of the effect control board 12, the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18) by the processing of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 10-5, and the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). As shown in the above, the attacker lamp 9c is turned on in a manner of notifying that the prize has been won. As described above, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c is emitted in a manner larger than the number of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c, which emits light in, for example, the big hit medium effect. In the example shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the launched game ball passes through the first path, which is the path in the direction of the big winning opening, and is guided to the winning path provided with the count switch 23. An example is shown. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured such that the time until the game ball existing in the large winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing in the upper part of the large winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period from the opening of the large winning opening, and the player's interest in the game is reduced without giving anxiety to the player. Can be prevented.

After the game ball has won the big prize opening as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), or after the state shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-17) has not been won, time has passed, and FIG. 10- When the predetermined period elapses as shown in 10 (a-19), (b-19) and (c-19), as shown in FIG. 10-6, the number of rounds corresponding to the 1st R is displayed and the jackpot medium effect is produced. Since it is the execution timing and the execution timing of the acquisition number display, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed.

Specifically, when the game ball wins the large winning opening before the lapse of a predetermined period as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-20), the first The number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and the count-up display is performed. Further, at the same timing as these displays, as a big hit middle effect (1st R middle effect), as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-20), a decorative pattern constituting the big hit is displayed and "BOUNUS" is displayed. , And the character are displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot and the display of "during BOUNUS" displayed as the jackpot middle production (1st R middle production) are not shown (the same applies to FIGS. 10-20 described later). It is displayed in a manner suggesting that it should be right-handed as shown in 10-21. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-1), when a fanfare or a right-handed effect is performed and a predetermined period elapses after the big winning opening is opened, the big hit medium effect is shown in FIG. 10-21. As shown in (A-2), the design of "7", which is a decorative design constituting the jackpot, is displayed in a front-facing manner, and is displayed above "B" in the "BOUNUS" display. A star-shaped image is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-3), the design of "7", which is a decorative design constituting the jackpot, is tilted toward the right back, and "in BOUNUS" is displayed. The star-shaped image shifts to the upper part of "O". Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-4), the symbol "7", which is a decorative symbol constituting the jackpot, faces the front, and a star is placed above the "N" in the "BOUNUUS" display. The shape image shifts. After that, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-5), the design of "7", which is a decorative design constituting the jackpot, is inclined toward the left back direction, and "U" in the display of "BOUNUS" is displayed. The star-shaped image shifts to the top of. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-6), the symbol "7", which is the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot again, faces the front, and the star is above the "S" in the "BOUNUUS" display. The image of the shape shifts and returns to FIG. 10-21 (A-2). In this way, in the big hit medium production, the decorative patterns that make up the big hit are operated in the right back direction, the front, and the left back direction, and a star-shaped image is displayed from the left character of the "BOUNUS middle" display to the right. It suggests to the player that he should hit right by shifting. The operation display of the decorative pattern that composes the jackpot and the transition display of the star-shaped image are called effect display. In addition to this, for example, a predetermined image is rotated clockwise or the character is gradually displayed. Includes indications such as pointing to the right. That is, the effect display may be displayed in a manner suggesting right-handed striking. According to this, it is suggested that the right-handed hit should be made by the effect display, and the right-handed hit can be easily recognized.

In the jackpot effect, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20), the effect lamp 9 lights up according to a light emission pattern preset according to the jackpot effect. In this example, it is assumed that a light emitting pattern is set in which the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately lit. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-21), "0015" is displayed as the acquired number display. In this way, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19), the effect lamp 9 is not emitted until the large winning opening is opened and the predetermined period elapses. As shown in -11 (c-20) and (c-22), the effect lamp 9 is made to emit light after the display of the number of acquisitions after the lapse of a predetermined period is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the early hitting by the player and promote the firing timing.

On the other hand, when the predetermined period elapses without the game ball winning the big prize opening, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-22), the count-up display is not performed and the number of acquisitions is displayed as "0000". Is displayed. In addition, the point that the number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and as the big hit middle production (1st R middle production), the decorative symbols constituting the big hit are displayed, "BOUNUS" is displayed, and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 lights up according to the light emission pattern set in advance according to the effect during the big hit are common regardless of whether or not a prize is won.

Next, as time elapses, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), when the tenth game ball wins the big winning opening in the first R, the upper limit at which the big winning opening can be opened. It will be a period. Along with the winning, the process of step 042AKS064 shown in FIG. 10-5 is executed, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and FIG. 10-12 (a-24). As shown in the above, the number of acquired "0150" is displayed. Further, along with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), and in addition to lighting the effect lamp 9 corresponding to the effect during the big hit, FIG. 10-12 (c-23). ), The attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner of notifying that a prize has been won. It should be noted that the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if it is counted after the lapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize. Specifically, the upper limit period is 29.5 seconds after opening, and is 28.9 seconds even after the elapse of a predetermined period. Since the continuous firing interval is 0.6 seconds, 10 prizes are sufficiently possible. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of security because sufficient time is secured for winning.

When the 10th game ball wins the big prize opening in the 1st R, the maximum period during which the big winning opening can be opened is reached. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-24), the large winning opening is opened. It is controlled to be closed. After that, during the period until the second R shown in FIG. 10-6 is started, the large winning opening is controlled to be completely closed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-25). On the other hand, until the predetermined period of the second R elapses (from the time when n = 2 until the predetermined period elapses), as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-25), the number of rounds corresponding to the first R is displayed. , The big hit production is continuously performed (the number of acquisitions is updated and displayed according to the winning), and the effect lamp 9 corresponds to the big hit production as shown in FIG. 10-12 (c-25). Lights up.

In the 1st R, when the 10th game ball wins the big winning opening and the upper limit period is reached, the big winning opening is controlled to be closed. At this time, the 11th game ball is controlled. In some cases, a so-called over-winning may occur in which the player wins a prize in the large winning opening following the tenth game ball. Even in the over-winning, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and the number of acquired "0165" may be displayed. In this case, after the count-up display and the number of winnings are displayed according to the tenth prize, the count-up display and the number of winnings corresponding to the over-winning are displayed, but FIG. 10-12 (b-25). As shown in the above, the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from the time when the large winning opening is completely closed to the time before the opening state corresponding to the second R is reached. Therefore, it is easy for the player to recognize that the over-winning has occurred in the first round, and the game interest can be improved. In addition, since the update of the number of acquisitions display in the opening corresponding to the first round does not overlap with the update of the number of acquisitions in the opening corresponding to the second round, it is possible to determine which prize will be awarded corresponding to the opening of the round. It will be easy. Further, the winning sound corresponding to the over winning sound may be a sound different from the normal winning sound (over winning sound). In this case, when the winning value exceeds the upper limit value "10", the over winning sound may be output. Further, the attacker lamp 9c may also emit light in a mode corresponding to over-winning, unlike the light emission in the normal winning mode.

Then, corresponding to the second round, the timing is such that the large winning opening is opened again as shown in FIG. 10-6, and the large winning opening is opened again as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-26). Is controlled to be. At this time, Yes is determined in step 042AKS065 of FIG. 10-5, that is, a command indicating the start of the n + 1R is received, and the process of 042AKS066 is executed, so that n = 2. Become. At this stage, since the process of step 042AKS055 in FIG. 10-5 is executed, as shown in FIGS. 10-13 (a-26) and (c-26), the big hit medium effect and the number of rounds corresponding to the first R The display is made (see also Figure 10-6).

Next, when the big winning opening is completely opened and the game ball wins the big winning opening as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-27), the step of FIG. 10-5 is different from the case of the 1st R. In the process of 042AKS060, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-27), and the number of acquired "0165" is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-28). Further, along with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-27), and in addition to lighting the effect lamp 9 corresponding to the effect during the big hit, FIG. 10-13 (c-27). ), The attacker lamp 9c lights up. As described above, in the rounds other than the 1st R, the number of winnings is updated and displayed during the predetermined period even if the prize is won during the predetermined period. Then, when the predetermined period of the second R elapses, the process of step 042AKS061 of FIG. 10-5 is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30), "2R" indicating that the second round is performed. The number of rounds is displayed, and the big hit middle production corresponding to the 2nd R is executed. In this case, the number of "1" in the round number display of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2". That is, "R" is continuously displayed from the first round. Further, the display of "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second R elapses. Further, in the feature unit 042AK of this embodiment, an example of executing a common big hit medium effect regardless of the number of rounds (the same applies to the lighting control of the effect effect lamp 9) is shown, but it is executed in each round. The production during the big hit may be different. The same applies to the lighting of the effect lamp 9. In this way, since the large winning opening is opened before the number of rounds indicating that it is the second round is displayed, the player's game ball that has been continuously fired from the first round is released at an early stage. You can win a prize in the big prize opening. Therefore, in each round of the plurality of round games, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game balls fired in succession are won in the large winning opening opened earlier than the round display.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-13 (a-26), (b-26), and (c-26), the large winning opening is controlled to be open corresponding to the second R, and FIG. 10-13 (a-29). ), (B-29), and (c-29) show that when a predetermined period has passed without the game ball winning after the large winning opening is completely opened, FIG. 10-14 (a-31). ), (B-31), and (c-31), the number of acquisitions acquired in the first R is continuously displayed as it is. After that, the same processing is performed until the final round determined in advance, and when it is determined that the hit end designation command has been received in step 042AKS051 of FIG. Set to end. In this way, for the second and subsequent rounds, if the prize is not won during the predetermined period, the number of winnings displayed in the previous round is continuously displayed, while the prize is won during the predetermined period. Is displayed by adding the number of acquired balls to the number of acquired balls displayed in the previous round. Therefore, even after the second round, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the big winning opening.

For example, in the final round, when the 10th game ball wins the big winning opening and the upper limit period is reached, the big winning opening is controlled to be closed. At this time, the 11th game is played. As shown in FIG. 10-15, the big hit game state may end while the ball is sandwiched between the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). .. In this case, at the start of the 1st R in the case of the next big hit (when the big winning opening corresponding to the 1st R is opened), the game ball will win the big winning opening, and during the predetermined period of the 1st R A game ball wins. Also in this case, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18), the attacker lamp 9c is turned on in a manner of notifying that the winner has been won, and after the lapse of the predetermined period, FIGS. 10-11 (a-20) and FIG. As shown in (a-21), after performing the count-up display, "0015" may be displayed as the acquired number display. Further, in such a case, there is a possibility that the launched game ball will further win a prize during the predetermined period (the second ball may win a prize), and in that case, after the predetermined period elapses, FIG. 10-11 ( As shown in a-20) and (a-21), after the count-up display is performed, "0030" may be directly displayed without displaying "0000" or "0015" as the acquisition number display. According to this, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the game entertainment.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 042AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the number of acquisitions by the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened and the first round is started. Then, if the game ball does not win the big prize opening within the predetermined period after the first round is started, a predetermined display indicating that the number of acquired balls has not increased is performed after the predetermined period, and the first round is performed. If the game ball wins the large winning opening within a predetermined period after the start of one round, the number of acquisitions is displayed as a specific display different from the predetermined display after the predetermined period. According to this, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player.

Further, when the game ball wins the large winning opening within a predetermined period after the first round is started, the effect control CPU 120 directly specifies the number of acquired "0000" as a predetermined display. Display the number of acquisitions of "0015" as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and to prevent the game from being enjoyed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs a count-up display as a notification display that the number of acquisitions will increase if the game ball wins the large winning opening within a predetermined period after the first round is started. , Display the number of acquisitions of "0015" as a specific display. According to this, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a prize and the number of acquisitions increases.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 counts the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing of receiving the command indicating that the large winning opening is open, which is transmitted from the main board 11 side in response to the opening of the large winning opening. Is started, and the number of acquisitions is displayed after the lapse of a predetermined period. According to this, since the predetermined period is suitably counted and the specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 closes the large winning opening door to guide the launched game ball through the second path of the upper part of the large winning opening door to the discharge path. By opening the winning opening door, the launched game ball is guided to the large winning opening through the first path and detected by the count switch 23. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured such that the time until the game ball existing in the large winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. .. According to this, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing in the upper part of the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period from the opening of the big winning opening, and the game is enjoyed without giving the player anxiety. Can be prevented from decreasing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the effect control CPU 120 strikes right as shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-3) between the time when the big hit is reached and the time when the big winning opening is opened. By performing the production, the player is informed that he / she should hit right. According to this, since the game area to be launched during the big hit is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game interest can be improved.

The open state of the large winning opening is a state in which the large winning opening is completely open, that is, the large winning opening is moved to a position where the large winning opening is completely open, and the large winning opening is opened. A command for specifying that the large winning opening is open is transmitted from the side of the main board 11 in response to the detection that the position has been moved to the completely open state. According to this, since the predetermined period is counted after the large winning opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player.

In addition, the big winning opening is also open for the game ball (early hit game ball) that was launched by performing the right-handed effect before the first R is started (before the big winning opening is open). If it exists in the upper part of the large winning opening at the timing, it is possible to win a prize within a predetermined period corresponding to the first R. The number of acquisitions is displayed as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the game ball hit early from being wasted.

Further, for example, in the final round, when the 10th game ball wins the big winning opening and the upper limit period is reached, the big winning opening is controlled to be closed. At this time, the 11th game is played. As shown in FIG. 10-15, the big hit game state may end while the ball is sandwiched between the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). .. In this case, at the start of the 1st R in the case of the next big hit (when the big winning opening corresponding to the 1st R is opened), the game ball will win the big winning opening, and during the predetermined period of the 1st R The winning of the game ball occurs, and the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of acquisitions as a specific display after the lapse of the predetermined period. According to this, it is possible to prevent the dissatisfaction felt by the player when an irregular event occurs.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a fanfare effect suggesting that the game is in a big hit game state from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening. Then, after the big winning opening is opened and a predetermined period has passed, the number of rounds is displayed together with the number of winnings, and it is possible to perform a big hit middle production corresponding to the round game. According to this, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by adding sharpness to the production.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the effect control CPU 120 is used when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening during a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened. The attacker lamp 9c is turned on as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening other than the predetermined period, the attacker lamp is also shown in FIG. 10-12 (c-23). Turn on 9c. According to this, since the specific display is performed when the prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and it is possible to visually recognize that the prize has been won within the predetermined period. It will be easier.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 10-5 (the same applies to step 042AKS064), for example, a unit of the game effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emits light in the big hit medium effect. Light is emitted in a mode that is greater than the number of light emission per hour (a mode for notifying that a prize has been won). According to this, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the effect control CPU 120 is concerned when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening during a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened. Outputs the winning sound corresponding to the winning. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), even when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening other than the predetermined period, a winning sound corresponding to the winning is output. According to this, it becomes easy to recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 also displays the number of rounds corresponding to the first and subsequent rounds in the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period after the round is started. conduct. According to this, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest without giving anxiety to the player, and in each round of a plurality of round games, It is possible to increase the possibility of winning consecutively fired game balls in the large winning opening opened earlier than the round display.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in the figure when the game medium does not win a prize in the large winning opening within a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened when the round game after the second round is performed. As shown in 10-14 (a-31), when the number of acquisitions displayed in the previous round game is continuously displayed, while the game medium wins the large winning opening within the predetermined period. Is displayed by adding the number of winning balls given in response to the winning from the winning number display displayed in the previous round game, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30). According to this, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the big winning opening even after the second round.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the count-up display as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23) even when an over-winning occurs, and displays the number of acquisitions of "0165". In this case, after the count-up display and the number of winnings are displayed according to the tenth prize, the count-up display and the number of winnings corresponding to the over-winning are displayed, but FIG. 10-12 (b-25). As shown in the above, the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from the time when the large winning opening is completely closed to the time before the opening state corresponding to the second R is reached. According to this, since the update of the acquired number display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the acquired number display at the next opening, it becomes easy to determine which opening corresponds to the winning.

Further, in the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18), the game is played during a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened, that is, in a situation where the number of acquisitions is not displayed. Although the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the ball wins the big prize opening, in the situation where the number of acquisitions after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed, for example, FIG. 10-11 (c-20) and ( As shown in c-21), the effect lamps 9 provided on the frame 3 for the multi-game machine and the effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately turned on, and more than during the predetermined period. The effect lamp 9 emits light. According to this, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and the number of acquisitions after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to liven up the production after that and improve the game entertainment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a right-handed effect and a fanfare effect before the start of the first round, and even after the large winning opening is opened, a predetermined period of time is reached. The effect lamps 9 may be turned on in sequence as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (c-3) to 10-9 (c-13) to suggest right-handed strikes, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. As shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), for example, the effect lamp 9 provided in the frame 3 for the double-game machine and the effect effect provided in the game board 2. The lamps 9 are turned on alternately. According to this, it is possible to suggest right-handed striking by using the effect lamp 9. Further, when the effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on after the large winning opening is opened to suggest a right-handed strike, after the last lit attacker lamp 9c is turned on, it is shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). The lights may be turned on as they are without being turned off as in the above-mentioned manner, and according to this, the player can be made aware that the big winning opening is in the open state.

In addition, the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if it is counted after the lapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize. According to this, it is possible to give the player a sense of security because sufficient time is secured for winning.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIGS. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19) until the large winning opening is opened and a predetermined period elapses, that is, until the number of winnings is displayed. In addition, the effect lamp 9 is not emitted, and as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the effect lamp 9 is emitted after the display of the number of acquisitions after the lapse of a predetermined period is displayed. Let me. According to this, it is possible to suppress the early hitting by the player and promote the firing timing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the effect control CPU 120 emits the effect lamp 9 at the same timing as the execution timing of the effect during the big hit after the elapse of a predetermined period. Let me. According to this, the production can be excited at once at the timing when the production during the big hit is executed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-21, the effect control CPU 120 suggests right-handed effect display for shifting and displaying a decorative pattern or a star-shaped image constituting a big hit at the timing when the number of acquisitions is displayed. Perform in a mode. According to this, the effect display suggests that the player should hit the right side, and the player can easily recognize that the player should hit the right side.

(Modification example of feature part 042AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the effect lamps 9 are turned on in order, suggesting that the effect lamp 9 should be right-handed. An example is shown in which all the effect lamps 9 are turned off after the right-handed effect by the effect lamp 9 is completed, but this is an example. For example, after the states shown in FIGS. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), FIGS. 10-16 (a-16A), (b-16A), (c-16A). As shown in FIG. 10-16 (c-16A) at the timing (FIG. 10-16 (b-16A)) when the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. The attacker lamp 9c provided at the position may be turned on. According to this, the player can easily visually recognize that the big winning opening is in the open state. The attacker lamp 9c may be continuously lit until a predetermined period elapses or during the opening period.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the round display is updated from the first round to the second round, the number of "1" in the number of rounds of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2". , "R" is continuously displayed from the first round, and "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second R elapses, but this is just an example. be. For example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, the display of "1" in the display of "1R" is deleted at the end of the open state corresponding to the first round, that is, at the timing when the large winning opening is closed. , "R" may be displayed only. Then, "2" may be displayed at the timing when the predetermined period of the second R has elapsed, and the round display of "2R" indicating that it is the second round may be performed. The same applies to the second and subsequent rounds. According to this, the end of each round can be visually recognized, and the game can be sharpened.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of winnings that is the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened is 10 (the upper limit winning number is 10). For example, the upper limit winning is set to 1. , If two pieces are entered during the predetermined period before the number of rounds is displayed, an over prize may be given. In this case, as the over-winning winning sound during the predetermined period, a sound different from the normal winning sound (over-winning sound) may be output, and the attacker lamp 9c may also emit light in a manner indicating the occurrence of over-winning. ..

Further, in the above embodiment, an example of counting the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening is shown for displaying the number of acquisitions, but in addition to this, the winning to the general winning opening 10 during the big hit is also counted. May be good. Since right-handed hits are made during the big hit, the general winning opening for winning is the general winning opening 10 provided above the variable winning ball device 6B. FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes in the case of counting the winning of the general winning opening 10 during the big hit. The same part as in FIG. 10-5 will not be described.

In the various display processes shown in FIGS. 10-18, when it is determined in step 042AKS056 that the prize designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), a general prize indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the general prize opening 10 is further obtained. It is determined whether or not the designated command has been received (step 042AKS081). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when the general winning opening 10 is won (step 042AKS081; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of acquired balls (step 042AKS081; Yes). Step 042AKS082). After executing the process of step 042AKS082, or when the general winning designation command has not been received, that is, when there is no winning in the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS081; No), the process proceeds to the process of step 042AKS059. In addition, along with winning the general winning opening 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won the general winning opening 10 (a winning sound different from the case where the large winning opening is won) may be output.

Further, in the various display processes shown in FIGS. 10-18, when it is determined in step 042AKS062 that the winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS062; No), it further indicates that the game ball has won the general winning opening 10. It is determined whether or not the general prize designation command has been received (step 042AKS083). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when the general winning opening 10 is won (step 042AKS083; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of acquired balls (step 042AKS083; Yes). Step 042AKS083), the number of acquisitions is updated and displayed (step 042AKS085). Even when the acquisition number update display in step 042AKS085 is performed, the acquisition number display is performed after the count-up display (notification display that the acquisition number increases) is performed. After executing the process of step 042AKS085, or when the general winning designation command has not been received, that is, when there is no winning in the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS083; No), the process proceeds to the process of step 042AKS065. In addition, along with winning the general winning opening 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won the general winning opening 10 (a winning sound different from the case where the large winning opening is won) may be output.

Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the case of counting the winning of the general winning opening 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20. 10-19 and 10-20 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation display in the image display device 5, an open / closed state of a large winning opening, and a lighting state of various lamps. (A-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in FIG. 10-19 are shown in FIG. 10-10 ( The same applies to a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17). As shown in the figure, when the big winning opening is opened, the counting of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period is started. When the game ball wins the general winning opening 10, the state shifts to the states shown in FIGS. 10-19 (a-18A), (b-18A), and (c-18A). Then, after the game ball has won the general winning opening 10 as shown in FIG. 10-19 (b-18A), or from the state shown in FIG. 10-19 (b-17), the game ball is also generally used in the large winning opening. When time elapses without winning the winning opening 10 and a predetermined period elapses as shown in FIGS. 10-19 (a-19A), (b-19A) and (c-19A), the game ball wins a general prize. When a prize is won in the mouth 10, the state shifts to the state shown in FIGS. 10-20 (a-20A), (b-20A), and (c-20A), and as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-20A). , The number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is the first round is displayed, and the count-up display is performed. Further, at the same timing as these displays, as a big hit middle effect (1st R middle effect), as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-20A), a decorative pattern constituting the big hit is displayed or "BOUNUS is in progress" is displayed. , And the character are displayed. In the jackpot effect, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (c-20A), the effect lamp 9 lights up according to a light emission pattern preset according to the jackpot effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-21A), "0003" is displayed as the number of acquisitions.

On the other hand, when the predetermined period elapses without the game ball winning the general winning opening 10, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-22A), the count-up display is not performed and the number of acquisitions is displayed as "0000". Is displayed. In addition, the point that the number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and as the big hit middle production (1st R middle production), the decorative symbols constituting the big hit are displayed, "BOUNUS" is displayed, and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 lights up according to the light emission pattern set in advance according to the effect during the big hit are common regardless of whether or not a prize is won.

As described above, even when the game ball wins the general winning opening 10 during the predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened at the start of the first round, the predetermined setting is the same as in the above embodiment. After the elapse of the period, "0003" is displayed as the number of winnings in response to the winning of the general winning opening 10. Further, when the game ball is not won in the general winning opening 10 during the predetermined period, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that the prize ball is not given. Therefore, since the number of winnings corresponding to the winning is displayed also for the game ball that has won the general winning opening 10 during the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from being anxious.

(Explanation of Means Related to Feature 042AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 042AK is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for instructing the display contents on the image display device 5) and
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing the game medium into a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win.
A control means (for example, a control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. CPU103 that performs round games, etc.)
The display means
It is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions).
When the first round game of the plurality of round games is performed, the grant amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period has passed after the big winning opening is opened),
If the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, the number of acquisitions). Display "0000" as a display, etc.),
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display. Etc.),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest without giving anxiety to the player.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the display means displays the specific display without displaying the predetermined display (for example, "0015" is displayed instead of displaying "0000". Display etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and to prevent the game from being enjoyed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the display means performs a count-up display indicating that the game value is given, and then the display means is given as the specific display. Display according to the value for the game (for example, "0015" is displayed after the count-up display, which is a notification display that the number of acquisitions is increasing), is displayed.
You may do so.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a prize and the number of acquisitions increases.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
The display means starts displaying the grant amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period after receiving the command indicating that the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, on the main board 11). Starting counting the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing when the specified command is received during the opening of the large winning opening sent from the side),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, since the predetermined period is suitably counted and the specific display is performed when the prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
The variable winning means passes through the first path (for example, by opening the large winning opening door, the launched game ball passes through the first path) that guides the game medium to the winning path in the first state. (For example, leading to the big winning opening) and the second path leading the game medium to the discharge path in the second state (for example, by closing the big winning opening door, the launched game ball is made large. A route forming means including a second path of the upper part of the winning opening door to lead to a discharge path, and a detecting means formed in the winning path to detect the winning of the game medium (for example, the count switch 23). Etc.), including,
The time from the path forming means to the detection means of the game medium is within the predetermined period (for example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, until the game ball existing in the large winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23). Time is configured to be 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing in the upper part of the big winning opening is detected within a predetermined period from the opening of the big winning opening, and the player can enjoy the game without giving anxiety. It is possible to prevent a decrease.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
After being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means becomes the first state, an operation promotion display for promoting the operation is performed to the player (for example, the big winning opening is opened after the big hit. In the meantime, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-3), a right-handed effect is performed to indicate to the player that the player should be right-handed),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, since the operation to be performed during the advantageous state is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game interest can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
The first state is a state in which the variable winning door included in the variable winning means is completely opened (for example, the open state of the large winning opening means that the large winning opening is completely open. That is, the main board 11 is in a state where the large prize opening door has been moved to a position where it is completely open, and corresponds to the detection that the large prize entrance door has been moved to a position where it is completely open. A designated command is sent from the side while the big winning door is open),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, since the predetermined period is counted after the large winning opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above.
When the game medium launched by performing the operation promotion display wins the variable winning means before the first round game in the advantageous state is started, the identification is performed after the lapse of the predetermined period. Display the display (for example, a game ball launched by performing a right-handed effect before the start of the 1st R can win a prize at the timing when the large winning opening is opened, and wins within the predetermined period. If so, the number of acquisitions will be displayed as a specific display after a predetermined period),
You may do so.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game medium launched before the start of the round game from being wasted.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above.
In the last round game of the plurality of round games in the advantageous state, when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state, the advantageous state is held with the game medium sandwiched between them. Finished (for example, in the final round, the eleventh game ball was sandwiched between the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the large winning door and the glass door frame 3a) as shown in FIG. 10-15). The jackpot game state ends in the state),
In the first round game when the advantageous state is controlled again, the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, so that the game medium in the sandwiched state wins the variable winning means. In this case, the specific display is displayed after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, the game ball wins the big prize opening at the start of the first R in the case of the next big hit, and the number of acquisitions as the specific display after the lapse of the predetermined period. Display etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the dissatisfaction felt by the player when an irregular event occurs.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above.
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect that is controlled to the advantageous state and suggests that the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state (for example, a large prize). From the closed state to the open state of the mouth, it is possible to execute a fanfare effect suggesting that the game is in a big hit game state), and it is executed when the display of the given amount display is started after the lapse of the predetermined period. It is possible to execute a round game display that can identify the round game and a production during the round corresponding to the round game (for example, after the large winning opening is open and a predetermined period has passed, the number of rounds is displayed together with the number of acquisitions. It is possible to perform a big hit production corresponding to round games, etc.),

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by adding sharpness to the production.

(Explanation of Means Related to Feature 043AK)
The feature unit 042AK includes the following feature unit 043AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 043AK is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for instructing the display contents on the image display device 5) and
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing the game medium into a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win.
A control means (for example, a control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. CPU103 that performs round games, etc.)
The display means
It is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions).
When the first round game of the plurality of round games is performed, the grant amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period has passed after the big winning opening is opened),
If the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, the number of acquisitions). Display "0000" as a display, etc.),
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display. Etc.),
Light emitting means (for example, effect lamp 9) and
A light emitting control means (for example, a production control CPU 120) for controlling the light emitting means is further provided.
In the light emission control means, the game medium wins a prize when the game medium wins the variable winning means after the lapse of the predetermined period and when the game medium wins the variable winning means before the lapse of the predetermined period. The light emitting means is controlled by the light emitting pattern corresponding to (for example, when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening, the attacker lamp 9c is made to emit light regardless of whether or not the winning is within a predetermined period).
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, since the specific display is performed when the prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and the prize is won within the predetermined period. Is easier to see.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c) located in the vicinity of the variable winning means that emits light when the game medium wins the variable winning means, and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, the attacker lamp 9c). For example, an effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c) and
The light emission of the specific light emitting means when the game medium wins the variable winning means has a larger number of light emission per unit time than the light emission of the predetermined light emitting means (for example, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 (step). 042AKS064 is also the same), in a mode that is greater than the number of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emits light during the jackpot production (a mode that notifies that a prize has been won, etc.),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
Further equipped with sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.)
The sound output means
When the game medium wins a prize in the variable winning means, a winning sound corresponding to the winning is output.
When the game medium wins the variable winning means after the lapse of the predetermined period, or when the game medium wins the variable winning means before the lapse of the predetermined period, the winning sound is output (for example, the game is played in the large winning opening). When the ball wins, the winning sound is output regardless of whether the winning is within the specified period),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, it becomes easy to recognize that the game ball has won the big prize opening, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 044AK)
The feature unit 042AK includes the following feature unit 044AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 044AK is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for instructing the display contents on the image display device 5) and
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing the game medium into a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win.
A control means (for example, a control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. CPU103 that performs round games, etc.)
The display means
It is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions).
It is possible to display a round game display that can identify the round game being executed (for example, display the number of rounds).
When the first round game of the plurality of round games is performed, the grant amount display and the first after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. The round game display corresponding to the round game is displayed (for example, in the first round, the number of rounds and the number of acquisitions are displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened).
When the second and subsequent round games are performed out of the plurality of round games, the second and subsequent round games have elapsed after the predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state. The round game display corresponding to the round game is displayed (for example, in the second round, the number of rounds is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened).
If the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, the number of acquisitions). Display "0000" as a display, etc.),
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display. Etc.),
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the game interest without giving anxiety to the player, and in each round of a plurality of round games. , It is possible to increase the possibility of winning consecutively fired game balls in the large winning opening opened earlier than the round display.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
When the second and subsequent round games are performed, if the game medium does not win the variable winning means within a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. , The grant amount display displayed in the previous round game is continuously displayed (for example, within a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened when the second and subsequent round games are performed). If the game medium does not win the big prize opening, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-31), the number of acquisitions displayed in the previous round game is continuously displayed, etc.),
When the second and subsequent round games are performed, if the game medium wins the variable winning means within a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. , From the grant amount display displayed in the previous round game, the grant amount corresponding to the game value given in response to the winning is added and displayed (for example, the game medium is displayed within a predetermined period). When a prize is won in the large winning opening, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30), the winning balls given in response to the winning from the number of winnings displayed in the previous round game are displayed. Add numbers and display),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the large winning opening even in the second and subsequent round games.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The display means can update and display the grant amount display being displayed in response to the game medium winning the variable winning means.
The update display of the grant amount display is completed until the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state and then changes to the first state again (for example, the large winning opening is completely closed). After that, the count-up display and the number of acquisitions corresponding to the over-winning will be completed within the period before the open state corresponding to the 2nd R),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, since the update of the acquisition number display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the acquisition number display at the next opening, it becomes easy to determine which opening corresponds to the winning. ..

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 045AK)
The feature unit 042AK includes the following feature unit 045AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 045AK is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for instructing the display contents on the image display device 5) and
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing the game medium into a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win.
A control means (for example, a control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. CPU103 that performs round games, etc.)
The display means
It is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions).
When the first round game of the plurality of round games is performed, the grant amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period has passed after the big winning opening is opened),
If the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, the number of acquisitions). Display "0000" as a display, etc.),
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display. Etc.),
With a plurality of light emitting means (for example, effect lamp 9),
A light emitting control means (for example, a production control CPU 120) for controlling the light emitting means is further provided.
The light emission control means is such that the variable winning means is in the first state when the variable winning means is in the first state and the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed. Control is performed so that the light emitting means emits light more than when the imparted amount display is not displayed before the elapse of the predetermined period (for example, during the predetermined period, that is, in a situation where the acquired number display is not performed, FIG. 10- As shown in 10 (c-18), the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball wins the big prize opening, but in the situation where the number of acquisitions after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed, the number of acquisitions is displayed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), the effect lamp 9 provided on the frame 3 for the double-game machine and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are used. The lamps are turned on alternately to emit more light from the effect lamp 9 than during the predetermined period),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, since the specific display is performed when the prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving anxiety to the player, and the number of acquisitions after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to liven up the production after the event is performed and improve the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
It is possible to display an operation promotion display for promoting the operation to the player (for example, right-handed display) after the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means is in the first state.
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c) located in the vicinity of the variable winning means that emits light when the game medium wins the variable winning means, and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, the attacker lamp 9c). For example, an effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c) and
When the variable winning means is in the first state, when the given amount display before the elapse of the predetermined period is not displayed, the predetermined light emitting means corresponds to the operation promotion display while emitting the specific light emitting means. The light is emitted in a light emitting pattern, and when the given amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period is displayed, the specific light emitting means and the predetermined light emitting means are made to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, the big winning opening). After being opened, the effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (c-3) to 10-9 (c-13) until a predetermined period elapses to suggest right-handed strikes. After the lapse of a predetermined period, for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), the effect lamp 9 and the game board 2 provided in the frame 3 for the multi-game machine are provided. When the effect lamps 9 are turned on alternately and the effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on after the big winning opening is opened to suggest a right-handed strike, after the last lit attacker lamp 9c is turned on, the figure is shown in the figure. Do not turn off the lights as shown in 10-9 (c-15), but leave them on as they are),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, the operation can be promoted by using the predetermined light emitting means, and the player can be made aware that the variable winning means is in the first state.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
In the round game, when a specific number of game media wins, one of the round games ends, and the game shifts to the next round game (for example, when 10 game balls win, the big winning opening is opened. It will be the upper limit period that can be done, etc.),
The time from the lapse of the predetermined period until the variable winning means enters the second state is a sufficient time for the game medium to win the specific number (for example, the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened). Is a sufficient period to count 10 game balls after a predetermined period has passed),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, a sufficient time is secured for winning, so that the player can feel reassured.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
In the round game, when a specific number of game media wins, one of the round games ends, and the game shifts to the next round game (for example, when 10 game balls win, the big winning opening is opened. It will be the upper limit period that can be done, etc.),
The time from the lapse of the predetermined period until the variable winning means enters the second state is a sufficient time for the game medium to win the specific number (for example, the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened). Is a sufficient period to count 10 game balls after a predetermined period has passed),
When the variable winning means is in the first state, the light emission of the light emitting means is restricted when the given amount display before the elapse of the predetermined period is not displayed, and the given amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period is displayed. After the display, the light emitting means is made to emit light (for example, until the large winning opening is opened and a predetermined period elapses, that is, until the number of winnings is displayed, FIGS. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19). ), The effect lamp 9 is not emitted, and as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the effect is displayed after the number of acquisitions after the lapse of a predetermined period is displayed. Make the lamp 9 emit light, etc.),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from hitting quickly and promote the firing timing.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above,
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect that is controlled to the advantageous state and suggests that the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state (for example, a fanfare effect). Is possible, etc.), and at the same time as the display of the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period is started, it is possible to execute the round game display that can identify the round game being executed and the production during the round corresponding to the round game. (For example, the number of rounds is displayed, the number of acquisitions is displayed, and the big hit production is performed after a predetermined period of time).
The light emitting means is made to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the effect during the round (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the timing is the same as the execution timing of the effect during the big hit. (For example, make the effect lamp 9 emit light),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, the production can be excited at once at the timing when the production is executed during the round, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
Further equipped with general winning means (for example, general winning opening 10) capable of winning a game medium,
The display means
It is possible to display the amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the general winning means as the given amount display (for example, the winning number display is displayed corresponding to the winning to the general winning opening 10). Etc.),
When the game medium does not win the general prize means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, the predetermined period). If the game ball does not win in the general winning opening 10, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that the prize ball has not been given),
When the game medium wins the general winning means within the predetermined period, a display corresponding to winning the general winning means is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, the large winning opening is open). If a game ball wins in the general winning opening 10 during the predetermined period after that, "0003" is displayed as the number of winnings in response to the winning in the general winning opening 10 after the lapse of the predetermined period. Etc.),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, even when the general winning means is won during the predetermined period, the display corresponding to the winning of the general winning means is displayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being anxious.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
The variable winning means is provided in a predetermined area in the game area (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the game area on the right side).
The display means
It is possible to display the first image (for example, a decorative pattern constituting a big hit) at the same timing as the above-mentioned grant amount display.
The first image is effect-displayed at the same timing as the grant amount display in the advantageous state (for example, an effect display for operating a decorative symbol constituting a big hit is performed).
The effect display is displayed in a mode suggesting the predetermined area (for example, as an effect display, the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot are operated in the right-back direction, the front, and the left-back direction to display the effect display in a mode suggesting right-handed striking. Such),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, the effect display suggests a game area to be fired, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the game area to be fired.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the description below but by the scope of claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is a special state that is more likely to be controlled to the normal state and the advantageous state than the normal state. (For example, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a time saving state (high-accuracy high-base state or low-accuracy high-base state)), and includes specific effect identification information (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol). A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by variably displaying a plurality of types of effect identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) to derive and display the display result. Machine 1)
Display means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for instructing the display contents on the image display device 5) and
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing the game medium into a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win.
A control means (for example, a control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. CPU103 that performs round games, etc.)
The display means
It is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions).
When the first round game of the plurality of round games is performed, the grant amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period has passed after the big winning opening is opened),
If the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, the number of acquisitions). Display "0000" as a display, etc.),
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the specific display is displayed without displaying the predetermined display (for example, "0015" is displayed instead of displaying "0000").
Moreover,
As the variable display, the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result, and then the variable display is restarted (for example, a pseudo-ream). A specific effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13) that can execute the effect).
The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the temporary stop suggestion effect) suggesting that the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. The part to do) and
The notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the notification effect (for example, the temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the specific effect identification information has been temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. The part to do) and
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means temporarily reduces the visibility of the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the first low visibility. It is possible to execute an effect of lowering the visibility to the second low visibility state, which is even lower than the state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-33 and 14-34, in the image display device 5, the concentration line is set to the density D1. After reducing the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols by displaying them, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D2),
As the notification effect, the notification effect executing means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35). , The part that makes the left and right decorative symbols invisible by displaying the effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-44, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped by executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed), the game machine can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest without giving anxiety to the player. Further, the suggestion effect can increase the player's expectation for the temporary stop, and the notification effect can be executed to increase the uplifting feeling for the temporary stop. Since the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop has not been performed, and the player's disappointment for not having the temporary stop can be alleviated. Because you will be able to play, you can improve the game fun.

In order to achieve the above objectives, other gaming machines
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by variably displaying a plurality of types of effect identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) to derive and display the display result. Machine 1)
Display means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for instructing the display contents on the image display device 5) and
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing the game medium into a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win.
A control means (for example, a control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. CPU103 that performs round games, etc.)
The display means
It is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions).
When the first round game of the plurality of round games is performed, the grant amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period has passed after the big winning opening is opened),
If the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, the number of acquisitions). Display "0000" as a display, etc.),
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display. Etc.),
Moreover,
As a variable display, special identification information (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol) different from the effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result. A specific effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 13) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) that resumes the variable display later.
The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the temporary stop suggestion effect) suggesting that the special identification information is temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. Part) and
The notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the notification effect (for example, the temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the special identification information has been temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. Part) and
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect executing means once reduces the visibility of the effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the visibility is further improved as compared with the first low visibility state. It is possible to execute an effect of lowering the second low visibility state to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-33 and 14-34, by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D1 in the image display device 5, the left and right are displayed. A part that further reduces the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D2 after reducing the visibility of the decorative patterns),
The notification effect execution means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification. Is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is continued for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. It can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-44, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed), the gaming machine can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest without giving anxiety to the player. Further, the suggestion effect can increase the player's expectation for the temporary stop, and the notification effect can be executed to increase the uplifting feeling for the temporary stop. Since the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop has not been performed, and the player's disappointment for not having the temporary stop can be alleviated. Because you will be able to play, you can improve the game fun.

That is, after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state, a predetermined display (when the prize is not won within the predetermined period) or a special display (winning within the predetermined period) is displayed as the grant amount display. When) is displayed, the amount of grant can be appropriately displayed to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game, and even if the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, the predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed is Since the effect display is continuously displayed, the suggestive effect can be strongly impressed on the player by the afterglow of the effect display, and the player's disappointment can be alleviated compared to the case where the effect display is terminated immediately after the predetermined timing has passed. Can be done. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that easily attracts the interest of the player when installed in the amusement park and easily improves the interest of the production.

Further, the specific effect and the ratio controlled to the advantageous state may be associated with each other. For example, a plurality of types of specific effects are provided, and the ratio of controlling to an advantageous state is changed depending on the specific effects to be executed. By doing so, it is possible to predict whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state, and when it is controlled in an advantageous state, the amount of grant will be displayed, and the interest will be improved.

Further, as another example of a gaming machine capable of improving the interest, a plurality of types of effect identification information (for example, decorative symbols) including specific effect identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous symbols) are variably displayed and displayed. It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can derive and display the result and control it to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
As the variable display, the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result, and then the variable display is restarted (for example, a pseudo-ream). A specific effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13) that can execute the effect).
The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the temporary stop suggestion effect) suggesting that the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. The part to do) and
The notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the notification effect (for example, the temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the specific effect identification information has been temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. The part to do) and
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means temporarily reduces the visibility of the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the first low visibility. It is possible to execute an effect of lowering the visibility to the second low visibility state, which is even lower than the state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-33 and 14-34, in the image display device 5, the concentration line is set to the density D1. After reducing the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols by displaying them, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D2),
As the notification effect, the notification effect executing means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35). , The part that makes the left and right decorative symbols invisible by displaying the effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-44, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped by executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed), the game machine can be mentioned.

Moreover,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by variably displaying a plurality of types of effect identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) to derive and display the display result. Machine 1)
As a variable display, special identification information (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol) different from the effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result. A specific effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 13) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) that resumes the variable display later.
The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the temporary stop suggestion effect) suggesting that the special identification information is temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. Part) and
The notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the notification effect (for example, the temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the special identification information has been temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. Part) and
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect executing means once reduces the visibility of the effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the visibility is further improved as compared with the first low visibility state. It is possible to execute an effect of lowering the second low visibility state to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-33 and 14-34, by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D1 in the image display device 5, the left and right are displayed. A part that further reduces the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D2 after reducing the visibility of the decorative patterns),
The notification effect execution means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification. Is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is continued for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. It can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-44, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed), the gaming machine can be mentioned. A form example of this gaming machine will be described below as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
FIG. 11 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 11A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 11B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of the figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 11A, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 65317 to 65535 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the set value is 1 and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, out of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and the other numerical ranges are set to "missing". Assigned. The case where the variable special figure has a set value of 2 to 6 in the first special figure and the gaming state is a normal state or a time saving state is as shown in FIG. 11 (A).

As shown in FIG. 11B, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 65317 to 65425 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the set value is 1 and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, out of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and the other numerical ranges are set to "missing". Assigned. The case where the variable special figure has a set value of 2 to 6 in the second special figure and the gaming state is a normal state or a time saving state is as shown in FIG. 11 (B).

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to "big hit" and "out of time saving" in each display result judgment table, as shown in FIG. 12, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the display result determination table for the first special figure in the above, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the display result judgment table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 are common. When only the numerical values in the numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range among the big hit judgment values. The numbers in the range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit judgment values determines the time saving loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and the time is shortened. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of jackpot judgment value (1020 to 1346) set in the previous term. Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction overlaps with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each set value.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range of the hit determination values from 1020 to 1346 is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the common numerical range (of the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1) When only the numerical values in (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot judgment value is within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range. The numbers are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and the time is shortened. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for the loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value (1020 to 1346) of the set value 6. Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value overlaps with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a common numerical value of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the range. The features of the other display result determination table for the second special figure are the same as those of the display result determination table for the first special figure.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, 65317 to 65317 to the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the time saving state, regardless of the set value. When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range of the time saving and the time saving is out, and the variable special figure is the second special symbol, the set value is set depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set to the common numerical range that is out of time. In other words, when the game state is the normal state and the time saving state, the ratio at which the variable display result is out of time reduction is the same ratio for all the set values, so that the gambling property depends on the set value. Can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Furthermore, with regard to the time-saving loss, which is assigned a common number of judgment values for each setting value, since it is set in a continuous numerical range from the time-saving loss reference value of 65317 in any setting value, it can be displayed in a variable manner. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 regarding the determination that the result is out of time reduction.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the set values that can be set are 6 from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. .. Further, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

The jackpot type may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 9 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 13, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S90175 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command that specifies to start the jackpot game state is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the effect process flag. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The jackpot effect process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to "" and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of Feature Unit 193SG in Embodiment of the Present Invention)
Next, the feature unit 193SG (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present feature unit 193SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described.

The gaming machine of Form 1 is
A plurality of types of effect identification information (for example, decorative symbols) including specific effect identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous symbols) are variably displayed to derive and display the display result, which is an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a state) (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
As the variable display, the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result, and then the variable display is restarted (for example, a pseudo-ream). A specific effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13) that can execute the effect).
The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the temporary stop suggestion effect) suggesting that the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. The part to do) and
The notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the notification effect (for example, the temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the specific effect identification information has been temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. The part to do) and
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means temporarily reduces the visibility of the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the first low visibility. It is possible to execute an effect of lowering the visibility to the second low visibility state, which is even lower than the state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-33 and 14-34, in the image display device 5, the concentration line is set to the density D1. After reducing the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols by displaying them, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D2),
As the notification effect, the notification effect executing means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35). , The part that makes the left and right decorative symbols invisible by displaying the effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-44, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped by executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestion effect, and it is possible to increase the uplifting feeling for the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and also to temporarily stop. If not, the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, so that the player can easily recognize that the temporary stop has not been performed, and the player is disappointed that the temporary stop has not been performed. Since the feeling can be softened, the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by variably displaying a plurality of types of effect identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) to derive and display the display result. Machine 1)
As a variable display, special identification information (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol) different from the effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result. A specific effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 13) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) that resumes the variable display later.
The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the temporary stop suggestion effect) suggesting that the special identification information is temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. Part) and
The notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the notification effect (for example, the temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the special identification information has been temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. Part) and
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect executing means once reduces the visibility of the effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the visibility is further improved as compared with the first low visibility state. It is possible to execute an effect of lowering the second low visibility state to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-33 and 14-34, by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D1 in the image display device 5, the left and right are displayed. A part that further reduces the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D2 after reducing the visibility of the decorative patterns),
The notification effect execution means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification. Is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is continued for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. It can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-44, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestion effect, and it is possible to increase the uplifting feeling for the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and also to temporarily stop. If not, the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, so that the player can easily recognize that the temporary stop has not been performed, and the player is disappointed that the temporary stop has not been performed. Since the feeling can be softened, the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is not temporarily stopped, the suggestion effect execution means is determined to temporarily stop the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) in the case of the temporary stop. The effect display is moved toward the position (for example, a portion where the concentrated line is moved and displayed toward the central portion of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 14-48 as a modification 193SG-1).
The gaming machine according to the first or second embodiment.
According to this feature, since the predetermined position can be specified by the effect display, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) has not been temporarily stopped.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is
The effect display is more transparent after the predetermined timing than before the predetermined timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-33, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the display image data Since the concentrated line is displayed at the density D2 before the switching timing and the concentrated line is displayed at the density D1 after the switching timing of the display image data, it is displayed more than before the switching timing of the display image data. The part where the left and right decorative patterns are more visible after the image data switching timing),
The gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 3, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.
According to this feature, the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) is not temporarily stopped by increasing the transparency of the effect display after a predetermined timing at which the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) is temporarily stopped. A game in which the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) is not temporarily stopped by making the player recognize that and raising the attention to the background image which is easy to see through the effect display. It can relieve a person's disappointment.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is
The suggestion effect executing means puts the effect display at a predetermined position where the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops. When any effect identification information (or effect identification information) different from the specific effect identification information is erased before the stop display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-44, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop). In the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C, the concentrated line is hidden before the decorative symbols of numbers other than "1", which is a combination of big hits, or "1", which is a combination of outliers, stop. Part),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 1 to Form 4, characterized in that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the stop of the effect identification information from being mistaken for a temporary stop.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is
When the notification effect is executed, the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is deformed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (G) to 14-35 (H)). In addition, the part where the pseudo-ream pattern has a crack and explodes),
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped, the effect position (for example, the first effect position) overlaps with at least a part of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information). A movable body (for example, a second movable body 193SG033) is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 1 to Form 5, characterized in that.
According to this feature, it is possible to further impress the player that the temporary stop is caused by the movement of the movable body and the deformation of the specific effect identification information (or special identification information).

The gaming machine of Form 7 is
The movable body is
The area that overlaps the first operation (for example, the movement from the retracted position shown in FIG. 14-2 to the first effect position) and the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is smaller than that of the first operation. It is possible to perform the second operation (for example, the movement from the retracted position shown in FIG. 14-2 to the second effect position).
In the notification effect, the first operation is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-35 (F), the portion where the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position during the temporary stop notification effect. ),
The gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment.
According to this feature, it is possible to impress the player that the temporary stop has been made while preventing the movable body from making it difficult to visually recognize the specific effect identification information (or special identification information).

The gaming machine of Form 8 is
The movable body has a light emitting unit capable of emitting light (for example, a second movable body LED193SG034).
In the first operation, the light emitting unit emits light in a mode corresponding to the effect display (for example, as shown in the modified example 193SG-2, the second movable body LED 193SG034 is temporarily stopped during the temporary stop notification effect. The part that emits light with the color of the concentrated line displayed in the suggestion effect),
The gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment.
According to this feature, since the light emitting unit emits light in a mode corresponding to the effect display, the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is
The first operation of the movable body ends before the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is erased (for example, FIGS. 14-35 (F) and 14-35 (G)). As shown in the above, a portion for moving the second movable body 193SG033 from the first effect position to the retracted position before the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5).
The gaming machine according to the seventh or eighth embodiment.
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize that the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) is deleted.

The gaming machine of form 10 is
When the notification effect is executed, the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is deformed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (G) to 14-35 (H)). In addition, the part where the pseudo-ream pattern has a crack and explodes),
After the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped, a specific effect corresponding display (for example, display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc.) suggesting that the N + 1th variable display is executed is displayed. Displayable specific effect-compatible display means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13) and
A movable body (for example, the second movable body 193SG033) that can operate at an effect position (for example, the first effect position) that overlaps with at least a part of the specific effect corresponding display displayed by the specific effect corresponding display means.
To prepare
The gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 9, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.
According to this feature, the movement of the movable body can increase the attention to the display corresponding to the specific effect, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 11 is
The movable body has a light emitting unit capable of emitting light (for example, a second movable body LED193SG034).
The light emitting unit emits light in an manner corresponding to the specific effect corresponding display (for example, when displaying "x2" as the first variable display start number notification effect, it is blue, and when displaying "x3". Is green, and when "x4" is displayed, it is red (the part that emits the second movable LED 193SG034), respectively.
The gaming machine according to the form 10, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.
According to this feature, since the light emitting unit emits light in a mode corresponding to the display corresponding to another variable display, it is possible to attract attention to the display corresponding to the specific effect, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 12 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop after the suggestion effect is executed, the special effect (for example, a portion displaying the temporary stop suggestion image in the central portion of the image display device 5). (For example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13)
With
When the suggestion effect is executed, the effect display of the suggestion effect is displayed in preference to the variable display of the effect identification information during the suggestion effect (for example, instead of the normal decorative symbol, a pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed. A portion of the image display device 5 that is moved and displayed from above to below),
As the special effect, the special effect executing means has a first effect period (for example, FIG. 14-) until the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) moves to a predetermined position and temporarily stops. As shown in 33, the predetermined position because the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) did not temporarily stop at the predetermined timing (the period before the display image data switching timing in the temporary stop suggestion effect). It is possible to execute an effect related to the transition between the second effect period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-33, the period after the display image data switching timing in the temporary stop suggestion effect) and the second effect period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-33). As shown in FIGS. 14-33, 14-35, and 14-44, a portion displaying a concentrated line while displaying a temporary stop suggestion image in the central portion of the image display device 5).
The gaming machine according to any one of the first to eleventh forms.
According to this feature, the display control in the suggestion effect becomes easy, and the transition to the second effect period becomes unnatural when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is not temporarily stopped by the special effect. It can be prevented from being lost.

The gaming machine of form 13 is
As the special effect, the special effect executing means receives the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stopped at the predetermined position at a position different from the predetermined position and the second effect. It is possible to execute an effect of overlapping and displaying the semi-transparent specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) at a position corresponding to the period (for example, a temporary stop suggestion image in the central portion of the image display device 5). The part that displays),
The gaming machine according to Form 12, characterized in that.
According to this feature, the transition to the second production period can be made more natural.

The gaming machine of form 14 is
The image display means can combine and display displays drawn on a plurality of drawing layers (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-3 and 14-4, image data 1, image data 2, and an image. Data 3 and data drawn as image data 4 can be combined and displayed on the image display device 5).
The drawing layer on which the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) and the effect display of the special effect are drawn is different from the drawing layer on which the effect display of the suggestion effect is drawn (for example, FIG. 14-3). As shown in the above, a temporary stop suggestion image is drawn as the image data 1, a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern is drawn as the image data 2, and a concentrated line is drawn as the image data 4).
The gaming machine according to Form 12 or Form 13, characterized in that.
According to this feature, since the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) and the effect display of the special effect can be drawn separately from the effect display of the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect and the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) can be drawn. ) And the degree of freedom of special production can be increased.

The gaming machine of form 15 is
When the notification effect is executed, it is possible to execute an effect of transforming the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) and then moving and erasing the effect (for example, FIG. 14-35 (G). )-As shown in FIGS. 14-35 (H), 14-36 (I) and 14-36 (J), the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed by moving toward the player side after the pseudo-continuous pattern has a crack and explodes. (Hidden part),
A specific effect corresponding display (for example, "x2", "x3", "x3", which suggests that the N + 1th variable display is executed after the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is deleted. It is further provided with a specific effect-compatible display means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 13) capable of displaying (display such as × 4).
The specific effect-compatible display means can move and erase the specific effect-compatible display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-37, display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. The part that is hidden after being moved toward the player side),
The effect identification information in the N + 1th variable display becomes visible between the time when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is deleted and the time when the specific effect corresponding display is deleted (for example, FIG. As shown in 14-37 (O), when "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. are displayed on the image display device 5, the left and right decorative patterns are visible to the player. part),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 1 to Form 14, characterized in that.
According to this feature, the effect of the notification effect and the display corresponding to the specific effect can be enhanced, and the effect identification information becomes visible before the display corresponding to the specific effect is erased, so that the variable display is restarted. Can be easily recognized by the player.

The gaming machine of form 16 is
The notice effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the effect display processing during variable display shown in FIG. 13) that can execute the advance notice effect for notifying that the advantageous state is likely to be obtained by using the effect identification information. Part)
The advance notice effect execution means limits the execution of the advance notice effect when the specific effect corresponding display is erased (for example, as shown in the modified example 193SG-3, as the first variable display start number notification effect, " When the display of "x2", "x3", and "x4" is moved and displayed (enlarged display) toward the player side, the part that restricts the execution of the advance notice effect),
The gaming machine according to the form 15, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to easily recognize that the variable display is restarted by executing the advance notice effect.

The gaming machine of form 17 is
Both the movement of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) and the movement of the specific effect corresponding display are movements toward the player who is playing the game (for example, the pseudo-continuous symbol explodes and the game is played. The part that is moved and displayed toward the player side and the part where the display such as "x2", "x3", "x4" is moved and displayed toward the player side),
The gaming machine according to Form 15 or Form 16, characterized in that.
According to this feature, the impression given to the player can be enhanced, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 18 is
The special effect (for example, the blast shown in the modified example 193SG-4) that makes it difficult to see the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stopped by displaying a special image after the notification effect is executed. It is provided with a special effect executing means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13) capable of executing a visibility-inhibiting image such as an image.
The specific effect executing means makes it possible to visually recognize the display corresponding to the resumption of the variable display after the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is made difficult to see by the special effect (for example, variant 193SG). As shown in -4, the part that executes revariable display after hiding the visibility-impaired image),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 1 to Form 17, characterized in that.
According to this feature, before the display including the effect identification information corresponding to the resumption of the variable display is started, a special effect that makes the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) difficult to see is executed. It can be easily understood that the variable display is restarted.

The gaming machine of form 19 is
An image display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying the variable display of the effect identification information and the effect display of each effect, and
A plate material provided on the player side of the image display means and having transparency so that the player can visually recognize the display of the image display means, and the special image can be displayed by emitting light from the outer peripheral side surface. A light guide plate (for example, the light guide plate shown in the modified example 193SG-4) and
With
In the special effect, the special effect executing means makes it difficult to visually recognize the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) displayed on the image display means by displaying the special image on the light guide plate. (For example, as shown in the modified example 193SG-4, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the player displays the pseudo-continuous symbol displayed on the image display device 5 by displaying the visibility-inhibiting image on the light guide plate. Parts that are difficult to see),
The gaming machine according to Form 18, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that.
According to this feature, since the special image is displayed on the light guide plate, the impression of the player can be enhanced, so that the effect of the special effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of form 20 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) before the predetermined timing is the specific effect after the predetermined timing. The movement speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the display image data switching timing is V1, but the display image is different from the movement speed of the effect identification information (or the special identification information) (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-33). The moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol after the data switching timing is V3),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 1 to Form 19, characterized in that.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily grasp whether the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) is before or after a predetermined timing at which the temporary stop is temporarily stopped.

The gaming machine of form 21 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped, the moving speed of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) to the predetermined position before the predetermined timing is determined. After the predetermined timing, the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) that has passed the predetermined position is different from the moving speed when returning to the predetermined position (for example, as shown in the modified example 193SG-5). Even if the continuous symbol does not temporarily stop at the central portion of the image display device 5, the pseudo continuous symbol returns to the central portion of the image display device 5 after once starting to move downward of the image display device 5. In this case, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the display image data switching timing and the center of the image display device 5 after passing through the center of the image display device 5 are provided. The part that makes the movement speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern different from the movement speed when returning to the part),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 1 to Form 20, characterized in that.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily grasp whether the movement is before passing the predetermined position or returning after passing the predetermined position.

The gaming machine of form 22 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) that has passed the predetermined position returns to the predetermined position, the suggestion effect executing means restricts the display of the effect display (for example, variant example 193SG). As shown in −5, when the pseudo-continuous symbol once passes through the central portion of the image display device 5 and then returns to the central portion of the image display device 5, the concentrated line is not displayed again).
The gaming machine according to the mode 21, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.
According to this feature, it can be further understood that the movement is a return movement after passing by.

The gaming machine of form 23 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped, the moving speed before the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped is the specific after the temporary stop. The moving speed of the pseudo-linked symbol before the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-linked symbol is V1 as shown in FIGS. 14-34, which is different from the moving speed at which the effect identification information (or the special identification information) moves (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34). However, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol is V2),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 1 to Form 19, characterized in that.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily grasp whether the movement is before the temporary stop or after the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form 24 is
The moving direction before the temporary stop of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is different from the moving direction in which the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) moves after the temporary stop (for example). , As shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35, the pseudo-continuous symbol before the temporary stop moves from the upper side to the lower side, but the pseudo-continuous symbol after the temporary stop is directed toward the player side (front side). The part that moves),
The gaming machine according to the form 23.
According to this feature, it is possible to make it easier to understand that the movement is after a temporary stop, and it is possible to prevent misidentification of the movement.

FIG. 14-1 is a configuration diagram showing a control board and the like in the feature unit 193SG. As shown in FIG. 14-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 193SG is provided with a second movable body 193SG033. The second movable body 193SG033 is provided with a drive motor (not shown), and can be operated by the effect control CPU 120 controlling the drive motor. Further, the second movable body LED 193SG034 for causing the second movable body 193SG033 to emit light is built in the second movable body 193SG033. The second movable body LED 193SG034 is connected to the lamp control board 14.

As shown in FIG. 14-2 (A), the second movable body 193SG033 in the non-operating state is arranged at a lower position (evacuation position) of the image display device 5 between the image display device 5 and the game board 2. ing. Since most of the second movable body 193SG033 is concealed by the game board 2 at the retracted position, it is difficult for the player to see.

The second movable body 193SG033 in the feature unit 193SG is shown in FIG. 14-2 as a jackpot notification when the temporary stop notification effect and the first variable display start number notification effect, which will be described later, are executed during the variable display, and during the reach effect of the super reach. It operates upward from the retracted position shown in (A).

Of these, when the temporary stop notification effect is executed and when the first variable display start number notification effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 14-2 (B), the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the image display device 5. While moving (moving) to the first effect position, which is the front position, when executing the jackpot notification in the reach effect of the super reach, the second movable body 193SG003 is as shown in FIG. 14-2 (C). It moves (operates) from the retracted position to the second effect position, which is the front position of the image display device 5 and above the first effect position.

Although not particularly shown, the second movable body 193SG033 that has moved to the first effect position or the second effect position returns to the retracted position from the first effect position or the second effect position according to the elapse of a predetermined period. It has become.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, the second movable body 193SG moves from the retracted position to the first effect position during the temporary stop notification effect, so that a part of the second movable body 193SG overlaps with the pseudo-continuous symbol in the front view. (See FIG. 14-35 (F)). On the other hand, the case where the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the second effect position is limited to the time when the jackpot notification during the super reach effect is executed. That is, the movement of the second movable body 193SG033 from the retracted position to the first effect position is also an operation in which the area overlapping with the pseudo-continuous symbol is larger than the movement from the retracted position to the second effect position.

Next, the display control unit 123 in the feature unit 193SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying an image on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 can display a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on the image data of 1 stored in the CGROM based on the instruction by the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not displayed on the image display device 5, the image of the predetermined image is arranged by arranging other image data on the front side of the image data of the predetermined image with a transparency of 0% depending on the situation. The predetermined image is not displayed on the effect screen by controlling the image based on the data so as not to be displayed on the effect screen and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as such.

As shown in FIGS. 14-3 (A) to 14-3 (D) and 14-4 (A) to 14-4 (D), for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5. , An image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the display data created by arranging a plurality of image data including the image data 1 to 4. Of these, FIG. 14-3 shows image data immediately before the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops as a temporary stop suggestion effect (see FIG. 14-35) in the feature unit 193SG, and FIG. 14-4 shows the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stopped. It is the image data when it does not stop.

As shown in FIG. 14-3 (A), the image data 1 has a pseudo-continuous symbol (this feature) in the central portion (“middle” decorative symbol display area 5C) of the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. In the section, it is data drawn to display a temporary stop suggestion image suggesting that the symbol (the symbol displayed as “NEXT”) is stopped (temporarily stopped).

The pseudo-ream symbol in the feature unit 193SG is a special symbol that is displayed on the image display device 5 only during the temporary stop suggestion effect or the temporary stop notification effect, which will be described later, as a part of the decorative symbol. This is a symbol in which a revariable display (pseudo-continuous effect) of a decorative symbol is executed by temporarily stopping the symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is a symbol displayed on the image display device 5 only during the temporary stop suggestion effect or the temporary stop notification effect, which will be described later, as a symbol different from the decorative symbol. It may be.

Further, in the present feature unit 193SG, a form in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is used as a special symbol displayed on the image display device 5 only during the temporary stop suggestion effect or the temporary stop notification effect is illustrated as a part of the decorative symbol. The invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous symbol may be a symbol displayed as a part of the variable display even during the period during the temporary stop suggestion effect or the temporary stop notification effect together with the normal decorative symbol.

Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is to be a symbol different from the decorative symbol, the normal decorative symbol (the symbol of the numbers "1" to "9" of the main feature portion) is temporarily stopped at the central portion of the image display device 5. After that, a case may be provided in which the pseudo-ream effect is executed by changing the temporarily stopped decorative symbol to a pseudo-ream symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 14-3 (B) and 14-4 (A), in the image data 2, the pseudo-continuous symbol described above is directed from the upper side to the lower side of the image display device 5 during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. The data is drawn to display the movement display of the image, and immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol, the image display device 5 is replaced with the pseudo-continuous symbol from above to below. This is data drawn to display a variable display of a normal decorative symbol (designs "1" to "9" in this feature unit 193SG).

Further, the image data 2 displays the swing display of the decorative symbol in each of the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, and does not display the temporary stop suggestion effect. It is also image data for displaying the variable display of the decorative symbol in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" at the time of execution.

As shown in FIG. 14-4 (B), the image data 3 is simulated from the central portion of the image display device 5 downward immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol. This is data drawn to display the moving display of the continuous pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 14-3 (C) and 14-4 (C), the image data 4 is displayed from the outer peripheral edge of the image display device 5 to the central portion (“middle” decorative pattern display) of the image display device 5. This is data drawn to display a concentrated line toward the area 5C).

As shown in FIGS. 14-3 and 14-4, display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5 are set in the image data 1 to 4. Image data 1 is set to have the highest display priority. Further, the display priority of the image data 2 is set lower than that of the image data 1, and the display priority of the image data 3 is set lower than that of the image data 2. The display priority of the image data 4 is set to be the lowest (image display priority in the image display device 5: image data 1> image data 2> image data 3> image data 4). That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as an image lower than the image based on the image data 1, and is based on the image data 3. The image is displayed as an image lower than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2, and the image based on the image data 4 is based on the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2 and the image data 3. It is displayed as an image below the image.

Although not particularly shown, the image data in the feature unit 193SG includes not only the image data 1 to the image data 4 but also the image data 5 drawn to display the background image in the image display device 5. .. The display priority of the image data 5 is set lower than that of the image data 4. That is, in the feature unit 193SG, the background image is displayed as the lowest layer data among the images displayed on the image display device 5.

Therefore, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 14-3 (D), the image based on the image data 2 (moving display from the upper side to the lower side of the pseudo-continuous symbol) is displayed in the image data 4. The image based on the image data (concentrated line) is displayed with priority, and the image based on the image data 1 (temporary stop suggestion image) is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 2 and the image based on the image data 4. Immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (D), the image based on the image data 3 (from the central portion of the pseudo-continuous symbol). The downward movement display) is displayed with priority over the image (concentrated line) based on the image data 4, and the image based on the image data 2 (moving display from the upper side to the lower side of the decorative pattern) is the image data. The image based on 3 and the image based on the image data 4 are displayed with priority over the image.

The transmittance of the concentrated line in the feature unit 193SG is set to be high (for example, 50%). Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 14-3 (C) and 14-4 (D), during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the player can see the decorative symbol, the pseudo continuous symbol, and the temporary stop suggestion through the concentrated line. The image is visible.

In particular, in the feature unit 193SG, during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. 14-3 on the image display device 5, thereby performing a pseudo-ream. The player is made to pay attention to whether or not the symbol is temporarily stopped. Further, in the variable display for executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) temporarily stops the pseudo-continuous symbol regardless of whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops at the start timing of the variable display. The image data to be stopped is set and the variable display is executed. Then, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data to be displayed on the image display device 5 at the display image data switching timing (see FIGS. 14-33) of the temporary stop suggestion effect in which the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop. The image data in which the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops (FIG. 14-3) is switched to the image data in which the pseudo-continuous symbol shown in FIG. 14-4 does not temporarily stop (FIG. 14-4).

FIG. 14-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 193SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 14-5 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-5 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (pre-determined result) and the determined result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C". The command 8C04H is the fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot". The command 8C05H is the sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time saving control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, the command 9502H is used as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) in which the time saving control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is used as the time saving control and probability change. This is the fourth game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game or the small hit.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the large winning opening and the notification command after opening the large winning opening, for example, the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open big hit state and the high-speed open big hit state, which will be described later, is supported. Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A has been satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation commands) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" as a winning judgment result, a judgment result of a big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, sudden probability), and a small hit. Is. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating a determination result of whether the random value for determining the variation pattern is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. Is.

The commands shown in FIG. 14-5 (A) are examples, and some of these commands may not be provided, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 14-6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 14-6, in the feature unit 193SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern , Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the display result of the general map is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), to update various numerical data by software to obtain random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating a part may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a "big hit" to the big hit game state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has any of "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to "". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random number value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 14-7 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 193SG uses a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The first special figure and the second special figure may use individual special figure display result determination tables.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. This is the referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 193SG, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table 1, whether or not the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment is controlled to the big hit game state with the special figure display result as a "big hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 193SG, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability of being determined (about 1/300 in the main feature unit 193SG) (about 1 in the main feature unit 193SG). / 30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probability changing state (high probability state), it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of the game is high.

Further, FIG. 14-7 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol that becomes The table referenced for.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the feature unit 193SG, regardless of whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, whether or not the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in the feature unit 193SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different between the case of the special figure game of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure. There is. Specifically, in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, it is assigned to "small hit". Judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning is formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control. In the high base state where a prize is given to the mouth and a lot of variable display of the second special figure is executed, "small hit" is almost not generated, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In a high base state in which a game ball easily enters the winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which a large number of game balls cannot be obtained and to prevent the game interest from being deteriorated.

FIG. 14-8 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. When the jackpot type determination table in the feature unit 193SG is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit", any of a plurality of jackpot types can be selected based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 193SG will be described with reference to FIG. 14-8 (B). In the feature unit 193SG, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability change big hit A" and "Probability change big hit B" that are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and high accuracy low base state where high accuracy control is executed but time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state. A "probability variation jackpot C" that shifts and a "non-probability variation jackpot" that shifts to a low probability high base state by executing only the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game state are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, the jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. .. In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probability variation jackpot" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. .. Therefore, the "probability change jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) probability variation jackpot, and the "probability variation jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probability variation jackpot. Further, in the big hit game by the "probability change big hit C", the round for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds), and the special in each round is executed. The opening period of the variable winning ball device 7 is shorter than other jackpot games (for example, 0.1 second), which is a high-speed opening jackpot. It should be noted that the probability variation control and the time saving control are not executed during the big hit game of any of the big hit types.

Further, although not particularly shown, the small hit game state in the feature unit 193SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player twice, and the opening time is the same as the probability variation big hit C. It is an open period (0.1 seconds in this feature unit 193SG). After the small hit game is completed, the game state immediately before the small hit game is inherited.

That is, in this feature unit 193SG, when it is determined to be "probability variation big hit C" or "small hit", variable display is executed with the same fluctuation pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 14-9). As a result of the variable display, the chance eye is stopped and displayed, and since the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same, these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 are used. Since it is not possible to distinguish between the "probability change jackpot C" in which the probability variation control is executed and the "small hit" in which the previous gaming state is continued without the probability variation control being executed, the probability variation jackpot C After the big hit game or the small hit game is completed, it is possible to continue the game while expecting the player to execute the probability change control.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot A and the probabilistic jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature unit 193SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when it becomes a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-8 (A), "probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are set according to whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure. The allocation of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is set to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" to control the normal open jackpot state or the high-speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds. Therefore, for example, by the high opening control accompanying the time saving control, in the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of the big hit state in which the number of winning balls obtained is small. It is possible to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-8 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it exists, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is a special figure game of the first special figure or a second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the judgment values for the "probability variation jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the allocation of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, a smaller judgment value than in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 14-9 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 193SG. In this feature unit 193SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is variable according to each of the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. Although the feature unit 193SG provides two types of normal reach fluctuation patterns, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, and the normal reach fluctuation pattern may be set to 1. It may be only the type. Further, in the super reach fluctuation pattern, a plurality of super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, such as super reach α, super reach β, and so on.

The fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 193SG includes a fluctuation pattern of a special hit corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "small hit" or the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C". PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 14-9, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 193SG is set shorter than that of the super reach fluctuation pattern.

Further, the normal reach variation pattern in the feature unit 193SG includes a variation pattern that does not execute a pseudo-continuous effect that temporarily stops and re-variablely displays the decorative symbol during the variable display, and a pseudo-continuous effect that executes the pseudo-continuous effect once during the variable display. There is a fluctuation pattern. In the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed during the variable display is set to have a shorter special figure variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during the variable display.

Further, the super reach variation pattern in the feature unit 193SG includes a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display and a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display. In the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display is set to have a shorter special figure variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display. ..

In addition, in this feature unit 193SG, since the jackpot expectation that the variable display result becomes "big hit" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach is set to be high, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern are set. The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

That is, with respect to the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 193SG, the higher the number of pseudo-continuous effects executed during the variable display, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the random values for determining the variation pattern type are used. The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

FIG. 14-10 is an explanatory diagram of a method of determining a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 193SG. In this feature unit 193SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-10, when the variable display result is a non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is used using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. PB1-1 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1-time jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach pseudo-continuous production 2 times jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-4 (super) It is decided from the reach pseudo-continuous production 3 times jackpot fluctuation pattern). If the variable display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) using the jackpot variation pattern determination table B. Fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1-time jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 2 times jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-4 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 3 times jackpot fluctuation pattern) ) And decide.

As shown in FIG. 14-10, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B have different determination ratios for PB1-1 to PB1-4. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, and PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%. PB1-4 is determined at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PB1- 4 is determined at a rate of 45%. That is, in the present feature unit 193SG, when the variable display result is the probabilistic jackpot A or the probabilistic jackpot B, the variable display result is determined to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach at a higher rate than when there is a non-probability jackpot. It has become. Furthermore, paying attention to the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect, when the variable display result is the probabilistic jackpot A or the probabilistic jackpot B, more pseudo-continuous effects are generated during the variable display than when the variable display result is the non-probable variable jackpot. It is easier to execute. Therefore, in the feature unit 193SG, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display and the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous production.

If the variable display result is a probability variation big hit C or a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to set the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation). Pattern) is decided. That is, in the present feature unit 193SG, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is the probability variation big hit C or the small hit, so that the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to identify whether the result is a probabilistic big hit C or a small hit.

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. Using the deviation pattern determination table A, the fluctuation patterns are set to PA1-1 (non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern), and PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production one-time out-of-range fluctuation pattern). ), PA2-3 (variation pattern of two misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production), PA2-4 (variation pattern of three misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production).

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 3, the deviation pattern determination table B for deviation is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B for use, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1 loss fluctuation pattern). ), PA2-3 (variation pattern of two misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production), PA2-4 (variation pattern of three misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production).

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for deviation is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1 loss fluctuation pattern). ), PA2-3 (variation pattern of two misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production), PA2-4 (variation pattern of three misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production).

If the variable display result is "out of place" in the time saving state (high base state), the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table D is used to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. It is determined from (non-reach out-of-time shortening variation pattern) and PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-time variation pattern).

That is, when the variable display result is "off" in the feature unit 193SG, the special figure is based on the fact that the number of reserved memory of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or the time is shortened. Since the variable display is executed at a high rate due to the shortening fluctuation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose fluctuation time is shorter than the normal non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). While preventing the game from being delayed, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit.

The RAM 102 in the feature unit 193SG is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special drawing holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure in which the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but has not yet been started. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on , Store until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and a starting winning (second starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on , Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit is associated with the hold numbers in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and is for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 of the above is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and periodically according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 holds the effect control data as shown in FIG. 14-11 (A) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Area 193SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 193SG190 shown in FIG. 14-11 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 193SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 193SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 193SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 193SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 193SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 193SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 193SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 193SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 193SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 193SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 193SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 193SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 193SG, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 193SG194A as shown in FIG. 14-11 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 193SG194. The reception command buffer 193SG194A at the time of starting winning is stored in the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 193SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, and the variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 193SG194A are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage. A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage separately is secured in association with the hold storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner while being shifted upward one by one. It is designed to be cleared in the special figure hit waiting process that is executed when the is finished.

Further, in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A of the feature unit 193SG, whether or not the determination of the display pattern accompanying the determination of whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed in the pre-reading advance notice setting process (FIG. 11) is undecided. That is, the display pattern is undecided because the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the hold storage number notification command are newly stored due to the occurrence of a new start prize. The display undecided flag indicating the above and the hold display flag in which the flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold storage display is set, respectively, corresponding to the first special figure hold memory and the second special figure hold memory. A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with the buffer number.

Further, in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A of the feature unit 193SG, a storage area can be stored so that the effect restriction flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage. Is secured for each storage area (entry). In the command analysis process (FIG. 14-18), the effect restriction flag is a symbol designation command, a variable category designation command, and a number of reserved memories, although a start prize is generated at the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. If the notification command is not received within the first hold storage number notification waiting time or the second hold storage number notification waiting time, which will be described later, it is a flag indicating that the entry is not the target of the pre-reading notice effect.

In the hold display flag, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold storage display is stored when the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is not determined in the look-ahead notice setting process described later. As a result, the hold storage display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first hold storage display area 193SG5D and the second hold storage display area 193SG5U provided in the lower part of the image display device 5. When it is decided to execute the reading notice effect, "1" (square) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display in a special mode (for example, square (◇) or star (☆)) different from the normal display mode. (◇))) Or "2" (star (☆)) is set, so that the reserved storage display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is the first reserved storage display area 193SG5D and the second reserved storage display area 193SG5U. In the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display, it is foretold that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the command buffer 193SG194A received at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the command buffer 193SG194A received at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, the variable category specification command, and the hold storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A shown in FIG. 14-11 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display that ended immediately before each time the variable display of the decorative symbol was started. The entry (entry with the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The stored contents of the entries after the hold storage of the variable display to be started are shifted from those stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 14-11 (B), each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that is shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning determination process of the feature unit 193SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-12. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting port switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in a state (step 193SGS101). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 193SGS101; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 193SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit. When the number of reserved first special figures is not the upper limit value in step 193 SGS 102 (step 193 SGS 102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit is set to "1" (step). 193SGS103).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step 193SGS101 (step 193SGS101; N) or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in step 193SGS102 (step 193SGS102; Y). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 193 SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 193SGS104; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the second special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 193SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit. When the second special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in step 193 SGS 105 (step 193 SGS 105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit is set to "2" (step). 193SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of step 193SGS103 and step 193SGS106, the number of special figure hold storages corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step 193SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first hold memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step 193SGS108). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit, may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step 193SGS108, the CPU 103 uses the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (step 193SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step 193SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the first 2 Numerical data indicating random values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the special figure hold storage unit.

The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step 193SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display mode including the variable display time.

Following the process of step 193SGS110, the transmission setting of the start opening winning designation command according to the start opening buffer value is performed (step 193SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is subjected to. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

Following the processing of step 193SGS111, the winning random number value determination processing is executed (step 193SGS112). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (Step 193 SGS113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

After executing the process of step 193SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (step 193SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 193SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 193SGS115), and then the process of step 193SGS104 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (step 193SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 193SGS116), and then the start prize is won. End the process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 14-13 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 193 SGS112 of FIG. 14-13 as the winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 193SG, the special symbol display result (variable display of the special symbol) is performed by the special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 5, FIG. 14-14) described later. The result) is regarded as a "big hit", and it is determined whether or not to control the big hit game state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 5, FIG. 14-15), which will be described later, the determination of the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing in step 193SGS112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). As a result, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of displaying the special symbol, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, whether or not to make a big hit at the start of the variable display is determined. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is a "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode, and based on this determination result, the effect control CPU 120 or the like determines. , As will be described later, advance notice effects such as pre-reading advance notice effects will be executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 14-13 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit, thereby performing the pachinko gaming machine. The current gaming state in 1 is specified (step 193SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are in the time saving state. When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 193SGS121, the special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 14-7 is selected and set (step 193SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 193SGS109 of FIG. 14-12 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (step 193SGS123). In the big hit judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result judgment table 1 selected by the process of step 193SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and each judgment. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating a minimum value (lower limit value) and a maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit".

When it is determined in step 193SGS123 that the jackpot is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not achieved in the variable display (step 193SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-7. 2 is selected and set (step 193SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 193SGS109 of FIG. 14-12 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step 193SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined to be a small hit in the variable display (step 193SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". The transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the above, is executed (step 193SGS126), the variation pattern determination table for special hits is selected and set (step 193SGS127), and the process proceeds to step 193SGS138. ..

If the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit judgment range, that is, if the variable display result is "missing" in the variable display, the symbol corresponding to the variable display result being "missing". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is a designated command, is executed (step 193SGS128), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is on, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (step). 193SGS129). When the time saving flag is off (step 193SGS129; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and when the time reduction flag is on (step 193SGS129; Y), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set. Table D is selected and set (step 193SGS131). The deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 2 or less. Further, the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

In this feature unit 193SG, in addition to the deviation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the deviation pattern determination table B used when the number of reserved storages is three , The deviation pattern determination table C used when the number of reserved storages is 4, is prepared in advance. Among these deviation pattern determination tables A to C, the deviation pattern determination table A is used. For example, 498 (about 50%) judgment values from 0 to 497 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take, and the fluctuation pattern for deviation is assigned. In the judgment table B, 598 judgment values (about 60%) from 0 to 597 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern in the range that the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern judgment can take, and the judgment value is for deviation. In the variation pattern determination table C, 698 determination values (about 70%) from 0 to 697 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. On the other hand, in the deviation pattern determination tables A to C, 100 (about 10%) determination values from 898 to 997 in the range that the random number value MR3 for determination of the variation pattern can take with respect to the variation pattern of the super reach. Is assigned.

Therefore, by determining the variation pattern using the deviation pattern determination table A in step 193SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always performed even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination. Therefore, in the determination at the time of starting winning, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination.

Further, when it is determined in step 193SGS123 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot at the time of variable display (step 193SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 14-13 (A). , The jackpot type is determined based on the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 193SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot A, a third symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot B, and a probability variation jackpot C. Executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command (step 193SGS133), and then determines whether or not the determined jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot. (Step 193 SGS134a). When the determined jackpot type is a non-probability variation jackpot (step 193SGS134a; Y), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected and set as a table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS135), and the step Proceed to 193SGS138.

Further, when the determined jackpot type is not a non-probability change jackpot (step 193SGS134a; N), it is further determined whether or not the determined jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot A or a probability variation jackpot B (step 193SGS134b).

When the determined jackpot type is probability variation jackpot A or probability variation jackpot B (step 193SGS134b; Y), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step). 193SGS136), the process proceeds to step 193SGS138.

When the determined jackpot type is not the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B (step 193SGS134b; N), that is, when the determined jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot C, the special hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set. (Step 193SGS137), the process proceeds to step 193SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 193SGS127, step 193SGS130, step 193SGS131, step 193SGS135, step 193SGS136, and step 193SGS137, each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and a random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination are executed. (Step 193SGS138), the variation category according to the range of the determination value including the random value MR3 is determined by using the numerical data indicating the above. In this feature unit 193SG, as shown in FIG. 14-13 (B), when at least the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode is "non-reach" in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", a variable category that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach), and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" are provided. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after making a setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 193SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 193SGS132), the winning random number value determination process is ended.

14-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 14-14, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure hold storage number is “0” (step 193SGS141). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 193SGS141, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit may be read, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 193SGS141 (step 193SGS141; N), the hold data stored corresponding to the hold number "1" in the second special figure hold storage unit. As a result, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 193SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 193SGS142, the second special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the second special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data in the second special figure reservation storage unit is updated as well as being updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure hold storage unit are shown. The pending data is shifted up one entry at a time (step 193SGS143).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "2" (step 193SGS144), the process proceeds to step 193SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step 193SGS141 (step 193SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step 193SGS145). .. The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 193SGS145, if the game control counter setting unit reads the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage counter and determines whether or not the read value is "0". good. As described above, the process of step 193SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 193SGS141 that the second special figure reserved storage number is "0", and the first special figure reserved storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

When the number of first special figure hold storage is other than "0" in step 193SGS145 (step 193SGS145; N), the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the hold number "1". As a result, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 193SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 193SGS146, the first special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the first special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data in the first special figure reservation storage unit is updated as well as being updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the hold storage unit of the first special figure are shown. The pending data is shifted up one entry at a time (step 193SGS147).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the variable special figure designated buffer to "1" (step 193SGS148), the process proceeds to step 193SGS149.

In step 193SGS149, the special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 14-7 is used as a table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is "big hit" or "missing". Select and set table 1. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determination value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing". , It is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "missing" (step 193SGS150a). In this step 193SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability change state) in which the probability change flag is on, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is in the high probability state (probability change state). ) Corresponds to the range of 1000 to 12180, it is determined to be a "big hit", and if it is not applicable, it is determined to be "missing". In the low probability state where the probability change flag is off, if the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is judged as a "big hit", and if not, it is judged as "missing". judge.

As described above, in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected in step 193SGS149, different determination values are assigned to the "big hit" according to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time. , Step 193 In the process of SGS150a, the special figure display result using different judgment data (judgment value) depending on whether or not the game state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is a highly accurate state. By determining whether or not to set "big hit", when the game state is in the high probability state, it is determined (determined) to be "big hit" with a higher probability than in the case of the low probability state.

When it is determined in step 193SGS150a that it is a "big hit" (step 193SGS150a; Y), the big hit flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit (step 193SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-8 (A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 193SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and the "non-probability variation jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be selected according to which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of "A", "probability variation jackpot B", and "probability variation jackpot C" is matched (step 193SGS154). ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 193SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be set to either a time-saving state or a probabilistic state in which the player has a higher advantage than the time-saving state. It will be decided before the definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 193SGS155), the determined jackpot type can be set. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot" corresponding to non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probability variation A" corresponding to probability variation jackpot A, it is set to "1". If it is "probability variation B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probability variation C" corresponding to probability variation jackpot C, it may be set to "3".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 193SGS150a that it is not a "big hit" (step 193SGS150a; N), the process proceeds to S150b, and the special figure display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 14-7 is selected and set. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determination value assigned to each special figure display result of "small hit", and the special figure is compared. It is determined whether or not the display result is a "small hit" (step 193SGS150c). In step 193SGS150c, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is "small hit" by using the determination value corresponding to the first special figure. When the variable special figure is the second special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" by using the determination value corresponding to the second special figure.

When it is determined in step 193SGS150c that the special figure display result is "small hit" (step 193SGS150c; Y), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is turned on (step 193SGS151).

On the other hand, if it is not determined in step 193SGS150c that the special figure display result is "small hit" (step 193SGS150c; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS156.

In step 193SGS156, as a result of pre-determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on), whether or not to control to the small hit gaming state (the small hit flag is turned on). A definite special symbol is set according to the pre-determined result of (whether or not it is done), and further, the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state. As an example, a special symbol indicating the "-" symbol, which is an outlier symbol, is set as the finalized special symbol in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "out of place". Further, when it is determined in step 193SGS150a that the special figure display result is "big hit", when the big hit type in step 193SGS154 is "probability variation big hit A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set to a confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B", the special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the finalized special symbol. When the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the finalized special symbol. Further, in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "small hit", the special symbol indicating the symbol "2" which is the small hit symbol is set as the finalized special symbol. It should be noted that these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 193SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 193SGS157), and then the special symbol normal processing is terminated. ..

If the number of reserved memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step 193SGS145 (step 193SGS145; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step 193SGS158), The normal processing of the special symbol is terminated. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed to the board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo specification command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 14-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 14-15, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS161). Then, if the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS161; Y), the jackpot type is specified from the jackpot type buffer value (step 193SGS162).

Then, it is determined whether or not the specified jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C" (step 193SGS163), and if it is not "probability variation jackpot C", that is, "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "non-probability variation jackpot B". In the case of either "probability variation jackpot" (step 193SGS163; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A or the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set according to the specified jackpot type. Specifically, when the specified jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the variable pattern determination table A for jackpot is selected and set, and the specified jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot A" or "probability variation jackpot B". , The jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set.

On the other hand, when the specified jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C" (step 193SGS163; Y), the special hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 193SGS165).

In the determination in step 193SGS161, if the big hit flag is not turned on (step 193SGS161; N), it is further determined whether or not the small hit flag is turned on (step 193SGS166). When the small hit flag is turned on (step 193SGS166; Y), the special hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 193SGS167), and the process proceeds to step 193SGS175.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 193SGS166; N), the game state is changed to the probabilistic state or the time saving state by determining whether or not the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit. It is determined whether or not the time saving control is being performed in (step 193SGS168). Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 193SGS168; Y), the deviation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to any of a plurality of types (step 193SGS168; Y). Step 193 SGS169).

On the other hand, when the time reduction control is not in progress, that is, when the time reduction flag is not turned on (step 193SGS168; N), for example, the stored value of the hold storage number counter of the fluctuation special figure provided in the game control counter setting unit. Is specified, and it is determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is used as a table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. Select and set (step 193SGS171).

Further, when the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170; N), it is further determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 193SGS172). ).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 3 (step 193SGS172; Y), the deviation pattern determination table B for deviation is selected as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. And set (step 193SGS173).

Further, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is not 3, that is, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is 4 (step 193SGS172; N), any one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used. As the table to be used for determining the above, the deviation pattern determination table C is selected and set (step 193SGS174), and the process proceeds to step 193SGS175.

After executing any of the processes of step 193 SGS 164, step 193 SGS 165, step 193 SGS 167, step 193 SGS 169, step 193 SGS 1711, step 193 SGS 173, and step 193 SGS 174, for example, a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern stored in a random number buffer for fluctuation. By referring to any of the selected (set) jackpot variation pattern determination table, special hit variation pattern determination table, or loss variation pattern determination table A to D based on the numerical data indicating Is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step 193SGS175).

When the jackpot flag is off, the variable display mode is determined by the process of step 193SGS175 to determine whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach". That is, the process of step 193 SGS 170 includes a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state when the variable display result is "off".

After determining the fluctuation pattern in step 193SGS175, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B according to the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value. A setting is made to start the variation of the special symbol so as to start any of the special symbol games using the second special symbol (step 193SGS176). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

Following the process of step 193SGS176, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol are made (step 193SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a first variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, and a variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result specification command and the first hold storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit uses the setting data indicating the storage address (start address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. It is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer provided in. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a second variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, and a variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result specification command and the second hold storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit. Stores in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 193SGS177, the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, is set (step 193SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the finalized special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is stopped and displayed. It's time. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step 193SGS179), and then the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 193SGS177, every time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the game state is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The specified command, the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the variable pattern specification command, the variable display result specification command, the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. It will be. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result specification command is first transmitted, the first variable display start command, the second variable display start command, and the variation pattern The command may be transmitted in the order of the designated command, the game state designation command, the first hold storage number notification command, the second hold storage number notification command, or the like.

FIG. 14-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing in step S112 to the ON state to end the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbol (step 193SGS180). When the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is terminated, and the variation special symbol designation buffer value is changed. When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol determination command to the effect control board 12 (step 193SGS181). Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS182), and when the jackpot flag is turned off (step 193SGS182; N), the jackpot flag is further turned on. Whether or not it is determined (step 193SGS183).

When the small hit flag is turned on, the effect control board 12 is set to transmit the hit start 5 designation command corresponding to the small hit (step 193SGS190a). Then, a value corresponding to the small hit display time is set in the small hit display time timer (step 193SGS190b). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, twice) is set in the large winning opening opening number counter (step 193SGS190c). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8" (step 193SGS190d), which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S118), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and the time saving flag to turn it off (step) if the probability change flag and the time saving flag are turned on. 193SGS184), hit start 1 designated command (probability variation jackpot A), hit start 2 designation command (probability variation jackpot B), hit start 3 designation command (probability variation jackpot C) according to the type of jackpot stored in the effect control board 12. ), Set to send the hit start 4 designated command (non-probability change) (step 193SGS185).

Further, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (step 193SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot, for example, in the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 193SGS187). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 10 times in the case of non-probability big hit or probable big hit A, 5 times in the case of probable change big hit B, and 2 times in the case of probable change big hit C) is set in the large winning opening opening counter. (Step 193 SGS 188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S114) (step 193SGS189).

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 193SGS183; N), in step 193SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". If the value of the time reduction counter is "0" (step 193SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 193SGS196.

On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (step 193SGS190; N), that is, in the high base state where the time reduction remains, the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by -1 (step). 193SGS191). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0" (step 193SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 193SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS196 and the value of the time reduction counter. When is "0" (step 193SGS193; Y), in order to end the time saving control, after clearing the time saving flag and turning it off (step 193SGS194), it corresponds to the state of the probability change flag or the time saving flag. After setting the transmission of the game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, low accuracy and low base) (step 193SGS195), the process proceeds to step 193SGS196.

In step 193SGS196, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, and then the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

FIG. 14-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is being counted (step 193SGS201). When the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 193SGS201; N), a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the jackpot end display time (big hit end display time) on the image display device 5 on the jackpot end display timer. Is set (step 193SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when the jackpot end display timer is operating (step 193SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 193SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 193SGS204). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 193SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 193SGS205).

When the stored jackpot type is not a non-probability change jackpot (step 193SGS205; N), it is further determined whether or not the stored jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot C (step 193SGS206).

When the stored jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot C (step 193SGS206; Y), after turning on the probability variation flag (step 193SGS210), the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

On the other hand, when the stored jackpot type is not the probability variation jackpot C, that is, when the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B (step 193SGS206; N), the probability variation flag is turned on (step 193SGS207). After turning on the time saving flag (step 193SGS208) and setting the time saving number counter to "0" (step 193SGS209), the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 193SGS205; Y), the time saving flag is turned on and "100" is set in the time saving number counter by executing step 193SGS211 and step 193SGS212. After that, the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

In step 193SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and the transmission setting of the jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type is set (step 193SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission of the game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the probabilistic change flag and the time reduction flag turned on (step 193SGS215), the value of the special figure process flag is special. It is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing (step 193SGS216).

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 14-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 6 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 14-18, the effect control CPU 120 first receives from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer. Determine if there is a command (step 193SGS221). At this time, if there is no reception command (step 193SGS221; N), it is determined whether or not the first or second reserved storage number notification waiting time set (set) in step 193SGS223 or step 193SGS225, which will be described later, has elapsed. (Step 193SGS237), if the waiting time for notifying the first or second reserved storage number has not elapsed (step 193SGS2375; N), the command analysis process ends. On the other hand, when the first or second hold storage number notification waiting time has elapsed, that is, the first hold storage number notification command or the second hold storage number notification command or the second is before the set first or second hold storage number notification waiting time has elapsed. When the hold storage number notification command is not received (step 193SGS237; Y), the display undecided flag of the entry in which the first hold storage number notification command or the second hold storage number notification command is not yet stored is turned on. At the same time, the effect restriction flag of the entry whose storage has not been completed is turned on (step 193SGS238), and the command analysis process is terminated.

If there is a reception command in step 193SGS221 (step 193SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the reception command, it is determined whether or not the reception command is the first start opening winning designation command. (Step 193 SGS 222). Then, when it is the first start opening winning designation command (step 193SGS222; Y), the first hold storage number notification waiting time is set (step 193SGS223). For example, in the process of step 193SGS223, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first hold storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 193SG192. Just do it.

If the reception command is not the first start opening prize designation command in step 193SGS222 (step 193SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second start opening prize designation command (step 193SGS224). Then, when it is the second start opening winning designation command (step 193SGS224; Y), the second hold storage number notification waiting time is set (step 193SGS225). For example, in the process of step 193SGS225, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second hold storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

If the reception command is not the second start opening winning designation command in step 193SGS224 (step 193SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is a symbol designation command (step 193SGS226). If the reception command is not a symbol designation command in step 193SGS226 (step 193SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is a variable category command (step 193SGS227). If the receive command is not a variable category command in step 193SGS227 (step 193SGS227; N), it is determined whether the receive command is the first hold storage number notification command (step 193SGS228). Then, when it is the first hold storage number notification command (step 193SGS228; Y), the first hold storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the time counting operation by the command reception control timer (step 193SGS229). ..

If the reception command is not the first hold storage number notification command in step 193SGS228 (step 193SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second hold storage number notification command (step 193SGS230). Then, when it is the second hold storage number notification command (step 193SGS230; Y), the second hold storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the time counting operation by the command reception control timer (step 193SGS231). ..

Then, after executing any of the processes of step 193SGS229 and step 193SGS231, the display undecided flag of the stored entry is turned on, and if there is an unreceived command, the effect restriction flag is turned on (step). 193SGS232).

When the reception command is a symbol designation command in step 193SGS226 (step 193SGS226; Y), when the reception command is a variable category command in step 193SGS227 (step 193SGS227; Y), or step 193SGS223, step 193SGS225, step 193SGS232 After executing any of the processes of, the received command is stored at the beginning of the free area in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A shown in FIG. 14-11 (step 193SGS233), and the process returns to the process of step 193SGS221.

When the hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command) is received together with the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command) , The hold storage number notification command may not be stored in the reception command buffer 193SG194A at the time of starting winning. That is, it suffices that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A.

If the reception command is not the second hold storage number notification command in step 193SGS230 (step 193SGS230; N), settings are made according to other reception commands (step 193SGS234). Then, it is determined whether or not the first or second reserved storage number notification waiting time set in step 193SGS223 or step 193SGS225 has elapsed (step 193SGS235), and the first or second reserved storage number notification waiting time has elapsed. If not (step 193SGS235; N), the process returns to step 193SGS221. On the other hand, when the first or second hold storage number notification waiting time has elapsed, that is, the first hold storage number notification command or the second hold storage number notification command or the second hold before the set first or second hold storage number notification waiting time has elapsed. When the hold storage number notification command is not received (step 193SGS235; Y), the display undecided flag of the stored entry is turned on, and the effect restriction flag of the corresponding unstored entry is turned on. After that (step 193SGS236), the process returns to the process of step 193SGS221.

FIG. 14-19 is a part of a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines the effect pattern (display pattern of the hold storage display) of the pre-read notice effect together with the presence / absence of the pre-read notice effect in the pre-read notice setting process (S161). Next, a hold display update process for updating the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 193SG005D and the second hold storage display area 193SG005U of the image display device 5 to a display corresponding to the storage contents of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A is performed. Execute (step 193SGS162).

FIG. 14-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 5 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 14-20, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display is being executed (step 193SGS240a). Whether or not the variable display is being executed may be determined by whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is any of 1 to 3.

If the variable display is not being executed (step 193SGS240a; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS241, and if the variable display is being executed (step 193SGS240a; Y), the first variable display start number notification effect is being executed. Whether or not it is determined (step 193SGS240b). As shown in FIGS. 14-29 (E), 14-30 (L), and 14-31 (S), the first variable display start number notification effect starts re-variable display as a pseudo continuous effect. This is an effect for notifying the number of times that the variable display of the decorative symbol including the re-variable display is started during the variable display of 1. Further, in step 193SGS240a, whether or not the first variable display start number notification effect is being executed may be determined by referring to the process data of the variable display being executed.

If it is not during the execution period of the first variable display start number notification effect (step 193SGS240b; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS241, and if it is during the execution period of the first variable display start number notification effect (step 193SGS240b; Y), the step By proceeding to 193SGS250, as will be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is set in the hold display flag. That is, the pre-reading advance notice effect is not executed during the execution period of the first variable display start number notification effect.

In step 193SGS241, the effect control CPU 120 checks the start winning command buffer 193SG194A. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning, depending on whether or not there is an entry in which the display undecided flag is on (set to "1") (step 193SGS242). ..

If there is no entry in which the display undecided flag is on (step 193SGS242; N), the read-ahead notice setting process is finished, and if there is an entry in which the display undecided flag is on (step 193SGS242; Y). , It is determined whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is the 4th symbol designation or the 6th symbol designation command, that is, whether or not the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a probability variation big hit C or a small hit ( Step 193SGS243a). When the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a probability variation big hit C or a small hit (step 193SGS243a; Y), by proceeding to step 193SGS250, as will be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is displayed. , Set to hold display flag. That is, the pre-reading advance notice effect is not executed for the hold memory that becomes the probability variation big hit C or the small hit.

On the other hand, if the symbol designation command is not the symbol designation command indicating the probability variation big hit C or the small hit, whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, the command indicating that the symbol designation command is off. (Step 193SGS243b). If the symbol designation command of the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a jackpot (either probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, or non-probabilistic jackpot) (step 193SGS243b; N), the entry is concerned. The jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command of (step 193SGS244).

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the look-ahead notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit and the jackpot type specified in step 193SGS244, the jackpot advance notice (not shown) is shown. By referring to the effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect and the display pattern when the pre-reading notice effect is executed (step 193SGS245).

In step 193SGS245, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 14-21 (A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 14-21 (A), the presence / absence of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are different depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of step 193SGS244. ..

Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (notice types) for the pre-reading notice effect, a display pattern α and a display pattern β. Of these, when the display pattern of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 193SG5D or the second hold storage display area 193SG5U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold memory display is a white star (☆) and the first hold memory display area 193SG5D or the second hold memory display is displayed. Displayed in area 193SG5U.

If the variable display result is a jackpot other than the probabilistic jackpot C, the pre-reading notice effect may not be decided to be non-executed, and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is always decided as the display pattern (notice type). The display pattern (notice type) of either the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-21 (A), when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot A", the display pattern α determines the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type). It is set higher than the ratio to be set. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B" or "non-probability variation jackpot", the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined. It is set low.

With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the big hit type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. The ratio of the probability variation jackpot A is increased, and the player's expectation of becoming the probability variation jackpot A can be increased.

In this feature unit 193SG, when the variable display result is a "big hit" other than the probabilistic big hit C, the hold memory display is displayed in a white square (◇) by always deciding to execute the pre-reading notice effect. The display pattern of either the display pattern α or the display pattern β displayed in the white star shape (☆) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot C. Even in the case of a "big hit" other than the above, a case may be provided in which the non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in the same manner as in the case where the variable display result is "missing".

Further, in step 193SGS243b, when the symbol designation command of the entry in which the display undecided flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, when it is a command indicating an outlier (step 193SGS243b; Y), the display is undecided. The variation category indicated by the variation category specification command of the entry in which the flag is on is specified (step 193SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category specification command of the entry is C600H, it is specified as a "non-reach" variation pattern category, and if it is C601H, it is a "super reach" variation pattern category. If it is C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation patterns including normal reach.

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit, and the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in step 193 SGS247, an deviation (not shown) is shown. By referring to the time look-ahead notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) when the look-ahead notice effect is executed (step 193SGS248).

In step 193SGS248, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 14-21 (B). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 14-21 (B), the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are determined according to the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in the process of step 193SGS247. It's different.

Specifically, two types of display patterns (notice types) are provided, a display pattern α and a display pattern β. Of these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the first hold storage display area 193SG5D or the second hold storage display area is represented by a white square (◇) in which the hold storage display is a specific mode. When it is displayed on the 193SG5U and the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold storage display is a white star (☆), which is a specific mode, and the first hold storage display area 193SG5D or the second hold. It is displayed in the storage display area 193SG5U. When the pre-reading notice effect is determined not to be executed, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 193SG5D or the second hold storage display area 193SG5U in a round shape (◯), which is a normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 14-21 (B), when the variable display result is "missing" and the variable pattern category is "other", the variable display result is "missing" and the variable pattern category. The rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than "no notice effect") is set higher than when is "non-reach". Also, when the variable display result is "off" and the variable pattern category is "super reach", the variable display result is "off" and the variable pattern category is "other". The rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than "no notice effect") is set high.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided when the variable display result is "off", when the variable category is "other", the variable pattern category is "non-reach". Also, the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set high. Further, when the fluctuation pattern category is "super reach", the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set higher than when the fluctuation pattern category is "other". Further, when the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is decided when the variable display result is "off", when the variable pattern category is "other", the variable pattern category is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than in the case of, and when the fluctuation pattern category is "super reach", the display pattern is higher than when the fluctuation pattern category is "other". The rate at which β is determined is set high.

When the variable display result is "off", the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be non-execution regardless of whether the variation pattern category is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach". Is set to the highest, and the ratio at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to the lowest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-21 (A), when the variable display result is "big hit", the pre-reading advance notice effect is not determined to be non-execution (no advance notice effect), and the pre-reading notice effect is not determined. The ratio at which the advance notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined is determined by the display pattern α or the display pattern β in any of the fluctuation pattern categories when the variable display result is “off”. It is set higher than the ratio to be set.

Further, when the variable display result is "off (non-reach)", "off (super reach)", or "off (other)", the display pattern α is determined when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined. Is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (probability variation A)" and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined, the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined is the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined. Is set higher than.

When the display pattern α or the display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect by such a setting, the display pattern α or the display pattern β is not executed (displayed). The variable display result is more likely to be a "big hit", and especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result is a "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A". Since the ratio of the above is increased, the expectation of the player can be increased.

After the execution of step 193SGS248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in step 193SGS247, that is, the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β. Whether or not it is determined (step 193SGS249).

After the execution of step 193SGS245 or when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined (step 193SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (notice type) is set in the hold display flag of the entry (step). 193SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 193SGS245 or step 193SGS248 is the display pattern α indicating the hold storage display by “◇”, “1” is set in the hold display flag of the entry, and the step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in 193SGS245 or step 193SGS248 is the display pattern β indicating the hold storage display by “☆”, the hold display flag of the entry is set to “2”, and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS251.

If the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not determined in step 193SGS249 (step 193SGS249; N), after setting the hold display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white "○" (step). 193SGS250), step 193SGS251.

After executing step 193SGS246 or step 193SGS250, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the display undecided flag of the entry to "0" (step 193SGS251). After that, the hold display is updated based on the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A (step 193SGS252). As a result, the hold memory newly stored in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to any of "0", "1", and "2" set in the hold display flag. NS. Further, even when the variable display is executed and the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A are shifted, the image display device 5 is used according to the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A after the shift. The hold display of the first hold storage display area 193SG5D and the second hold storage display area 193SG5U provided at the lower position is updated.

Specifically, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is one, one reserved storage display is displayed. As for the display mode of the hold storage display, when the flag value of the hold display flag corresponding to the hold storage is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○" and the flag value of the hold display flag is When it is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", it is displayed in the display mode of "☆". If the number of hold storages in the first special figure is two, two hold storage displays are displayed, and each hold storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the hold display flag of the corresponding hold storage. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 193SG5D. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is three, three reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding pending storage display flag. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 193SG5D. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is four, four reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding pending storage display flag. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 193SG5D.

Further, if the number of the second special figure reserved storage is one, one reserved storage display is displayed. As for the display mode of the hold storage display, as in the case of the first special figure, when the flag value of the hold display flag corresponding to the hold storage is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○". When the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed. It is displayed in the mode. If the number of hold storages in the second special figure is two, for example, two hold storage displays are displayed, and each hold storage display corresponds to the flag value set in the hold display flag of the corresponding hold storage. As a mode, for example, the hold storage display of 1 is displayed in the display mode of “◯”, and the hold storage display of 1 is displayed in the second hold storage display area 193SG5U in the display mode of “☆”. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is three, three reserved storage displays are displayed, and each of the reserved storage displays corresponds to the flag value set in the corresponding reserved display flag of the reserved storage. Is displayed in the second hold storage display area 193SG5U. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is four, four reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding pending storage display flag. Is displayed in the second hold storage display area 193SG5U.

Then, each time the variable display is executed, the hold storage display is also shifted in a predetermined shift direction (in the feature unit 193SG, the center direction of the screen) as the hold memory is reduced (consumed).

That is, when the hold memory is consumed in the variable display start setting process described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, and the hold memory of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A is shifted, the start winning after the shift Based on the hold storage of the receive command buffer 193SG194A, the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 193SG5D and the second hold storage display area 193SG5U is also shifted and displayed, and there is a new hold memory due to the start winning. In this case, the display pattern of the hold storage is determined and set in the hold display flag, and the first hold storage display area 193SG5D or the second hold is set in the display mode according to the flag value set in the hold display flag. It will be displayed in the storage display area 193SG5U.

The feature unit 193SG exemplifies a mode in which the process of step 193SGS252 is executed in the pre-reading notice setting process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first reserved storage display area 193SG5D is not limited thereto. The process for updating the hold display of the second hold storage display area 193SG5U may be individually executed as a process different from the pre-reading notice setting process (for example, the hold display update process).

Further, in the present feature unit 193SG, on the condition that there is a new storage of the command at the time of the start winning in step 193SGS242, it is decided to execute or not execute the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the start winning. Since the start winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time, a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning in both the first special figure and the second special figure in step 193SGS242 is performed. If it is determined that there is, that is, if there is an entry in which the display undecided flag is on in both the first special figure hold memory and the second special figure hold memory, both entries are pre-read notice. It is the target of decision on whether to execute or not to perform the production. Both the hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the first special figure is newly stored and the hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special figure is newly stored are executed and non-executed of the pre-reading notice effect. In the case of the decision target, if there is no entry of the hold display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, the hold display of the hold memory of the first special figure and the hold of the second special figure are held. The pre-reading notice effect may be executed at the same time on both sides of the display.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, when the start winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time as described above, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special figure is issued. Both the newly stored hold memory and the newly stored hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special figure is newly stored are subject to the determination of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect. In such a case, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure, and the execution and non-execution of the pre-read notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure. Execution may be decided by only one of them.

Specifically, when the game state is a normal state in which the high opening control is not performed, the decision of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure is held in the second special figure. Prioritize the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the first special figure is set. When it is decided not to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the figure, it may be decided to execute or not execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, when the game state is a time saving state (high accuracy high base state / low accuracy high base state) in which high opening control is performed, execution and non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure. Is prioritized over the decision of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the second special figure is made. When it is decided not to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the figure, it may be decided to execute or not execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure.

FIG. 14-22 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 193SGS271). When the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A The various command data and various flags stored in association with the above are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 193SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 193SGS271 (step 193SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS273). When the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 193SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is finished, and when the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS273; Y). ), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A, one buffer number. It shifts upward by the minute (step 193SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 193SGS272 or step 193SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 193SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) and the variation pattern (step 193SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In the feature unit 193SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols "7" as stop symbols. ”Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from the combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as the stop symbol. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the sixth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the probability variation big hit C. Decide from the inside. Further, if the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation and the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach variation pattern, the three symbols are irregular as stop symbols. It is a symbol, and a combination (outlier symbol) other than the above-mentioned chance eyes is determined. If the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the loss and the variation pattern of the variable display is the reach variation pattern, the left and right symbols are the same as the stop symbol, but the middle symbol is medium. Determine the combination of reach loss (missing symbol) with different symbols.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern that executes a pseudo continuous effect during the variable display (step 193SGS277). When the variation pattern is a variation pattern for executing the pseudo-continuous effect during the variable display (step 193SGS277; Y), the notice effect determination process for the variable display for executing the pseudo-continuous effect (for non-execution of the pseudo-continuous effect). Is executed to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect during the variable display and the advance notice effect to be executed (step 193SGS278).

After executing step 193SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern. When the fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern (193SGS279; Y), it is determined whether or not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect instead of the temporary stop notification effect based on the variable display result (step 193SGS280). .. The temporary stop notification effect is an effect of notifying the player that the decorative symbol has been temporarily stopped by outputting a temporary stop notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous effect. The special temporary stop notification effect is to temporarily stop the background image displayed on the image display device 5 in addition to outputting the temporary stop notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous effect. The decorative design is temporarily stopped by updating to the background image according to the number of times (the first special background image if the number of temporary stops is the first, the second special background image if the number of temporary stops is the second, and the third special background image if the number of temporary stops is the third). Is a production that informs the player.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect is determined (step 193 SGS281). When the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect is determined (step 193SGS281; Y), the process table corresponding to the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect and the fluctuation pattern is selected and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (step 193SGS282).

When the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach fluctuation pattern (193SGS279; N) or when it is determined not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect (193SGS281; N), the temporary stop notification effect period is set to 2 seconds based on the variable display result. It is determined from 1.5 seconds (step 193SGS283). Then, the process table is selected according to the temporary stop notification effect period and the fluctuation pattern determined in step 193SGS283, and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (step 193SGS284).

Further, when the variation pattern is a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed during the variable display (step 193SGS277; N), the notice effect determination process for the variable display that does not execute the pseudo-continuous effect is executed and the variable display is in progress. Whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the advance notice effect to be executed are determined (step 193 SGS285). After deciding whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the advance notice effect to be executed in step 193SGS285, the process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is selected and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (193SGS286).

In step 193SGS287, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected by any of 193SGS282, 193SGS284, and 193SGS286 (step 193SGS287).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 193SGS288). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (phone number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 193SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 193SGS289). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 193SGS290). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Every time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. The variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized by outputting the signal corresponding to the image data to the image display device 5 and displaying the image according to the signal by the image display device 5. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 193SGS291).

The effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer by -1 each time the effect process is executed during the variable display, and determines whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer is not timered out, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and if the process timer is timered out, the process is switched to the next process data, and the next process is performed again. The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by starting the timer and controlling the effect device according to the absence of the next process data. When the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the advance notice effect in the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the advance notice effect execution process for executing the advance notice effect in the variable display during effect process. ..

Next, the flow of the variable display for executing the pseudo continuous effect will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 14-23 (A), when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during the variable display, first, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped after reaching the reach. The suggestion temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. The temporary stop suggestion effect in the feature unit 193SG is such that after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. Is a production that performs variable display at a lower speed than usual. The length of the temporary stop suggestion effect period differs depending on the length of the temporary stop notification effect period determined in step 193SG283 of the variable display start setting process.

When the temporary stop notification effect period is determined to be the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds), the temporary stop suggestion effect ends when the first temporary stop timing A is reached, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is provisionally displayed. The stop is executed and the temporary stop notification effect is executed for 2 seconds. If the temporary stop notification effect period is determined to be the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds), the temporary stop suggestion effect ends when the first temporary stop timing B is reached, and the pseudo stop notification effect is simulated. Temporary stop of the continuous symbol is executed, and the temporary stop notification effect is executed for 1.5 seconds. As shown in FIG. 14-23 (A), the temporary stop notification effect period A and the temporary stop notification effect period B have the same timing, that is, the temporary stop notification effect has an effect period of 1.5 seconds and 2 Regardless of which of the seconds is determined, it is set to always end at a specific timing.

Then, when the temporary stop notification effect is completed, the revariable display notification effect is executed. In the revariable display notification effect, in addition to outputting the revariable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the image of the character corresponding to the number of revariable display times on the image display device 5 (character A if the number of revariable display times is the first). This is an effect of notifying the player that the revariable display of the decorative symbol is executed by displaying the image of the character B for the second time and the image of the character C for the third time.

The first revariable display is executed during the revariable display notification effect. When the revariable display notification effect is completed, the first variable display start number notification effect is executed from the end timing of the revariable display notification effect. In the first variable display start count notification effect, the variable display count of the decorative symbol including the re-variable display count is displayed on the image display device 5, and the effect image of the color corresponding to the variable display count is displayed on the left and right ends of the image display device 5. It is a production to display. That is, in the first variable display start count notification effect corresponding to the first revariable display, "x2" is displayed on the image display device 5, and blue effect images are displayed on the left and right ends of the image display device 5. In the first variable display start count notification effect corresponding to the second revariable display, "x3" is displayed on the image display device 5, and green effect images are displayed on the left and right ends of the image display device 5. In the first variable display start count notification effect corresponding to the third revariable display, "x4" is displayed on the image display device 5, and red is displayed on the left and right ends of the image display device 5. This is an effect that displays an effect image.

Then, when the first variable display start number notification effect is completed, the second variable display start number notification effect is executed from the end timing of the first variable display start number notification effect. The second variable display start number notification effect is an effect of displaying the variable display number of the decorative symbol including the revariable display number on the image display device 5 in a size smaller than that of the first variable display start number notification effect.

After the second variable display start number notification effect is completed, the reach is reached again and the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. At this time, the reach effect of the normal reach is executed without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol.

As shown in FIG. 14-23 (B), when the non-execution of the special temporary stop notification effect is determined and the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display. Similar to the case where the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 14-23 (A) is a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-ream effect is executed once during the variable display, the temporary stop suggestion effect after the reach is reached and the first pseudo-ream effect, respectively. Temporary stop and revariable display of the symbol, temporary stop notification effect, revariable display notification effect, first variable display start number notification effect, second variable display start number notification effect, and first temporary stop and revariable display are executed. After that, it becomes reach again, and the second temporary stop and revariable display of the pseudo-continuous symbol, the temporary stop notification effect, the revariable display notification effect, the first variable display start number notification effect, and the second variable display start number notification effect are executed. Will be done. Then, after the second variable display start number notification effect is completed, the reach is reached again and the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. At this time, the reach effect of the super reach is executed without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol.

If the first temporary stop notification effect is executed in the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds), the second temporary stop notification effect is also executed in the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds). When the first temporary stop notification effect is executed in the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds), the second temporary stop notification effect is also set in the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds). Is executed.

Further, as described above, in the second revariable display notification effect, an image of a character (character B) different from that of the first revariable display effect is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in the second variable display start number notification effect and the second variable display start number notification effect, the image display device 5 includes the first variable display start number notification effect and the second variable display start number notification effect. Is different, "x3" ("x3" having a size smaller than that of the second first variable display start number notification effect in the second second variable display start number notification effect) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 14-25, when it is decided not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect and the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, FIG. 14- Similar to the case where the variation pattern shown in 23 (B) is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, the temporary stop suggestion effect after reaching the reach and the pseudo-continuous pattern up to the second time, respectively. Temporary stop and revariable display, temporary stop notification effect, revariable display notification effect, first variable display start number notification effect, and second variable display start number notification effect are executed. Then, after the second variable display start number notification effect is completed, the reach is reached again, and the third temporary stop and revariable display of the decorative symbol, the temporary stop notification effect, the revariable display notification effect, and the third 1 The variable display start number notification effect and the second variable display start number notification effect are executed, and further, the reach effect of super reach is executed.

If the first and second temporary stop notification effects are executed during the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds), the third temporary stop notification effect is also set during the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds). If the first and second temporary stop notification effects are executed in the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds), the third temporary stop notification effect is also performed in the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds). It is executed in 1.5 seconds).

Further, as described above, in the third revariable display notification effect, the image display device 5 displays an image of a character (character C) different from the first and second revariable display effects. Further, in the third variable display start number notification effect and the second variable display start number notification effect, the image display device 5 includes the second variable display start number notification effect and the second variable display start number notification effect. Is different, "x4" ("x4" having a size smaller than that of the third first variable display start number notification effect in the third second variable display start number notification effect) is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 14-26, when the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect is determined and the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, the temporary stop is first performed. Suggestion production is executed.

In the variable display, the temporary stop notification effect ends when the first temporary stop timing A is reached, the temporary stop of the decorative symbol is executed, and the special temporary stop notification effect is executed for 2 seconds. .. That is, in the variable display executed by the special temporary stop notification effect, the temporary stop suggestion effect period and the special temporary stop notification are different from the variable display in which the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed (the temporary stop notification effect is executed). The production period is unchanged.

After the end of the special temporary stop notification effect, the first revariable display of the decorative symbol is executed without executing the revariable display notification effect and the first variable display start number notification effect. Further, after a while, the second variable display start number notification effect is executed. That is, in the variable display, after the first special temporary stop notification effect is executed, as the first revariable display notification effect, the image of the character (character A) is displayed or as the first variable display start number notification effect. The display of "x2" on the image display device 5 is not executed, and the image display device 5 as the second variable display start number notification effect has a size smaller than that of the first variable display start number notification effect "x2". Is only displayed

Then, after the first temporary stop and revariable display of the decorative symbol, the special temporary stop notification effect, and the second variable display start number notification effect are executed, the second temporary stop and revariable display of the decorative symbol, special After the temporary stop notification effect and the second variable display start number notification effect are executed, the reach effect of the super reach is further executed.

As the second variable display start number notification effect, as in FIG. 14-23 (B), the image display device 5 displays "x3" having a size smaller than that of the first variable display start number notification effect. Is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 14-27, when the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect is determined and the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, FIG. 14-26. Similarly, after the temporary stop suggestion effect, the temporary stop and revariable display of the decorative symbols up to the second time, the special temporary stop notification effect, and the second variable display start count notification effect are executed, the third decorative symbol is provisionally displayed. The stop and revariable display, the special temporary stop notification effect, the second variable display start number notification effect are executed, and the reach effect of the super reach is further executed.

As the third variable display start number notification effect, as in FIG. 14-23 (B), the image display device 5 displays "x4" having a size smaller than that of the first variable display start number notification effect. Is executed.

Although a part of the above is described, as shown in FIGS. 14-28, the temporary stop notification effect in the feature unit 193SG is a pseudo-continuous effect in which the temporary stop notification sound is emitted from the speaker 8L from the timing when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. , It is an effect of notifying the player that the decorative symbol has been temporarily stopped by outputting from 8R, and is an effect executed for 2 seconds or 1.5 seconds.

The special temporary stop notification effect is the number of temporary stops of the background image displayed on the image display device 5 in addition to outputting the temporary stop notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous effect. By updating to the background image according to the above (the first special background image if the number of temporary stops is the first, the second special background image if the second is the second, and the third special background image if the number of temporary stops is the third), the decorative design is temporarily stopped. It is a production that notifies the player. The special background image displayed on the image display device 5 as the special temporary stop notification effect is an image that is displayed until the update timing to the next special background image or the end of the variable display, while the temporary stop notification. The sound output period (special temporary stop notification effect period) is 2 seconds, which is the same as a part of the temporary stop notification effect.

The re-variable display notification effect is an image of a character corresponding to the number of re-variable display on the image display device 5 in addition to outputting the re-variable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (if the re-variable display number is the first time, the character). This is an effect of notifying the player that the revariable display of the decorative pattern is executed by displaying the image of A (the image of character B for the second time and the image of character C for the third time). The effect period of the revariable display notification effect (the display period of the character image on the image display device 5 and the output period of the revariable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R) is 3 regardless of the number of times the revariable display is executed. Seconds. As described above, in the variable display for executing the pseudo-continuous effect, the higher the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed (the number of times the temporary stop / re-variable display is executed), the higher the jackpot expectation is set. Regarding the display notification effect, the jackpot expectation is set to be the highest when the image of the character C is finally displayed, and the jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest when the image of the character A is finally displayed.

The first variable display start number notification effect is for notifying the number of times that the variable display of the decorative symbol including the revariable display is started during the variable display of 1 after the revariable display is started as a pseudo continuous effect. This is an effect, and the number of times that the variable display of the decorative symbol including these revariable displays is started in the image display device 5 (“× 2” in the first variable display start number notification effect, and the second variable display In the start number notification effect, "x3" is displayed, and in the third variable display start number notification effect, "x4") is displayed. The effect period of the first variable display start number notification effect is 1 second regardless of the variable display number of the decorative symbol including the re-variable display.

The second variable display start number notification effect is an effect for notifying the number of times that the variable display of the decorative symbol including the re-variable display is started during the variable display of 1 after the first variable display start number notification effect. , The number of times that the variable display of the decorative symbol including the revariable display is started in the image display device 5 (“× 2” in the first variable display start number notification effect, and the second first variable display start number notification In the production, "x3" is displayed for the third time as well as "x4" in the first variable display start number notification effect) in a smaller size than the first variable display start number notification effect. The effect period of the second variable display start number notification effect is 2 seconds regardless of the variable display number of the decorative symbol including the re-variable display.

14-29 (A) is a flowchart showing a notice effect determination process (for execution of pseudo continuous effect) of the variable display start setting process in FIG. 14-22. In the advance notice effect determination process (for executing the pseudo continuous effect), the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 193 SGS301). Then, a random number value for determining the execution of the advance notice effect is extracted, and the random value and the table for determining the advance notice effect (not shown) are used to execute the pseudo-continuous effect. The production is determined (step 193SGS302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-29 (B), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect is 20%. The execution of the group notice effect is determined at a rate of 45%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect is determined at a rate of 30%.

The cut-in notice effect is an effect in which the cut-in image is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 14-29 (F), and the group notice effect is an effect shown in FIG. 14-29 (G). As shown, this is an effect in which a large number of characters are displayed so as to cross the display area of the image display device 5.

If the variable display result is off and the super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach is off), the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 40%, the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 30%, and the group. The execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 25%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect is decided at a rate of 5%. If the variable display result is off and the normal reach fluctuation pattern (normal reach is off), the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 90%, the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 8%, and the group. The execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 2%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect is decided at a rate of 0%.

That is, in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the feature unit 193SG, the jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest when neither the cut-in notice effect nor the group notice effect is executed, and the cut-in notice effect is set as the notice effect. When only the group notice effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is set higher than when neither the cut-in notice effect nor the group notice effect is executed, and when only the group notice effect is executed as the notice effect, the cut-in notice effect is set. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when only is executed, and the jackpot expectation is set to be the highest when both the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are executed as the notice effect (pseudo-ream). Big hit expectation regarding the notice effect in the variable display that executes the effect: Cut-in notice effect + group notice effect> group notice effect> cut-in effect> non-execution).

After the execution of step 193SGS302, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the advance notice effect (determines the execution of at least one of the cut-in advance notice effect and the group advance notice effect) (step 193SGS303). When the execution of any of the advance notice effects has not been decided (step 193 SGS303; N), the advance notice effect determination process (for executing the pseudo continuous effect) is terminated, and when the execution of any of the advance notice effects is decided (step 193 SGS303; N). Y) stores the determined advance notice effect, sets the advance notice effect start waiting timer, and ends the advance notice effect determination process (for executing the pseudo continuous effect) (step 193SGS304, step 193SGS305).

As shown in FIGS. 14-32, the executable period of these advance notice effects overlaps with the revariable display notification effect period and the first variable display start number notification effect period. In particular, when it is decided to execute both the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect as the notice effect, these cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are taken during the revariable display notification effect period and the first variable display start count notification effect period. The production is executed in duplicate.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, when the execution of any of the notice effects is decided in the notice effect determination process (for executing the pseudo continuous effect), the same notice effect is executed in all the revariable display notification effect periods. (See FIGS. 14-29 to 14-31).

FIG. 14-30 (A) is a flowchart showing a notice effect determination process (for non-execution of pseudo continuous effect) of the variable display start setting process in FIG. 14-22. In the advance notice effect determination process (for non-execution of the pseudo continuous effect), the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 193 SGS311). Then, a random number value for determining the execution of the advance notice effect is extracted, and the random number value and the table for determining the advance notice effect (not shown) are used to determine whether or not the advance notice effect is executed in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is not executed and the advance notice to be executed. The production is determined (step 193SGS312).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-30 (B), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect is 30%. Will be decided at a rate of 65%, and the execution of the group notice effect will be decided at a rate of 65%.

If the variable display result is off and the super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach is off), the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 40%, the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 35%, and the group. The execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 25%. If the variable display result is off and the normal reach fluctuation pattern (normal reach is off), the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 90%, the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 8%, and the group. The execution of the notice production is decided at a rate of 2%.

That is, in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is not executed in the feature unit 193SG, the jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest when neither the cut-in notice effect nor the group notice effect is executed, and the cut-in notice effect is set as the notice effect. When only the group notice effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is set higher than when neither the cut-in notice effect nor the group notice effect is executed, and when only the group notice effect is executed as the notice effect, the cut-in notice effect is set. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when only is executed (big hit expectation regarding the notice effect in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous effect: group notice effect> cut-in effect> non-execution).

After the execution of step 193SGS312, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the advance notice effect is determined (step 193SGS313). When the execution of the advance notice effect is not decided (step 193SGS313; N), the advance notice effect determination process (for non-execution of the pseudo continuous effect) is ended, and when the execution of the advance notice effect is decided (step 193SGS313; Y), the advance notice effect is determined. The determined advance notice effect is stored, and the advance notice effect start waiting timer is set to end the advance notice effect determination process (for when the pseudo continuous effect is not executed) (step 193SGS314, step 193SGS315).

When the advance notice effect is executed in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is not executed, the advance notice effect may be executed in any period during the period from the start timing of the variable display to the reach timing.

FIG. 14-31 (A) is a diagram showing a determination ratio when the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect in step 193SG280 in FIG. 14-22. In step 193SG280 in FIG. 14-22, if the variable display result is a big hit (super reach big hit), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the special temporary stop notification effect (executes the temporary stop notification effect) at a rate of 20%. It is decided, and the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect (non-execution of the temporary stop notification effect) is determined at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, if the variable display result is off (super reach is off), the non-execution of the special temporary stop notification effect (execution of the temporary stop notification effect) is determined at a rate of 80%, and the special temporary stop notification effect is executed (execution of the special temporary stop notification effect). (Non-execution of temporary stop notification effect) is determined at a rate of 20%.

That is, in the present feature unit 193SG, when the special temporary stop notification effect is executed in the variable display for executing the pseudo continuous effect (the temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, and the image is displayed. When the special background image is displayed on the display device 5), the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed (when only the temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol; The jackpot expectation is set higher than when the temporary stop notification effect is executed (the jackpot expectation in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous effect: special temporary stop notification effect execution> special temporary stop notification effect not executed). ..

Further, as described above, paying attention to the case where the special temporary stop notification effect is executed, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed once during the variable display, the image corresponds to the first temporary stop of the decorative symbol. The first special background image is only displayed on the display device 5, but when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, the image display device 5 responds to the temporary stop of the first decorative pattern. After the first special background image is displayed on the image display device 5, the second special background image is displayed on the image display device 5 in place of the first special background image in response to the second temporary stop of the decorative pattern (first special background image). The third special background image is displayed on the image display device 5 in place of the second special background image in response to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern (from the second special background image). (Updated to the 3rd special background image).

That is, with respect to the variable display for executing the pseudo continuous effect, the higher the number of pseudo continuous effects executed during the variable display, the higher the expectation of a big hit is set. Therefore, the background image finally displayed on the image display device 5 is set. Is set to have the highest jackpot expectation when is the third special background image, and the jackpot expectation is lowest when the background image finally displayed on the image display device 5 is the first special background image. Big hit expectation for the special background image that is set (in the variable display that executes the pseudo-continuous effect) that is finally displayed on the image display device 5: 3rd special background image> 2nd special background image> 1st special background image ).

FIG. 14-31 (B) is a diagram showing a determination ratio when the effect control CPU 120 determines the temporary stop notification effect period based on the variable display result in step 193SG283 in FIG. 14-22. In step 193SG283 in FIG. 14-22, if the variable display result is a big hit, the temporary stop notification effect period is determined to be the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds) at a rate of 60% and 40%. The temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds) is determined at the ratio of. On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of alignment, the temporary stop notification effect period is determined to be the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds) at a rate of 40%, and the temporary stop notification effect period B (1) is determined at a rate of 60%. .5 seconds). That is, in the case where the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, if the effect period of the temporary stop notification effect is set to 2 seconds, the effect period of the temporary stop notification effect is 1. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when it is set to 5 seconds (the jackpot expectation regarding the production period of the temporary stop notification effect when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed in the variable display that executes the pseudo-continuous effect). : Temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds)> Temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds)).

Further, the feature unit 193SG exemplifies a mode in which the temporary stop notification effect period can be determined from 2 seconds and 1.5 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the temporary stop notification effect period is limited to this. It may be uniquely determined in one period, or it may be determined from three or more periods.

Further, the feature unit 193SG exemplifies a mode in which a longer temporary stop notification effect period has a higher expectation of a big hit than a shorter temporary stop notification effect period, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, a shorter temporary stop notification effect period may have a higher expectation of a big hit than a longer temporary stop notification effect period.

Next, the output mode of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the variable display will be described. As shown in FIGS. 14-32, first, the speakers 8L and 8R can output BGM (musical music) based on the progress of the variable display. The BGM is output during variable display excluding the revariable display notification effect period. Further, the speakers 8L and 8R can output a temporary stop suggestion sound, a temporary stop notification sound, a revariable display notification sound, and a first variable display start number notification sound. Of these, the temporary stop suggestion sound is output only during the temporary stop suggestion effect period, the temporary stop notification sound is output only during the temporary stop notification effect period, and the revariable display notification sound is output only during the revariable display notification effect period. The 1 variable display start number notification sound is output only during the first variable display start number notification effect period.

Further, the speakers 8L and 8R can output a cut-in notice effect sound and a group notice effect sound. Of these, the cut-in notice effect sound is output only during the cut-in notice effect execution period when the execution of the cut-in notice effect is decided, and the group notice effect sound is decided to execute the group notice effect. If so, it is output only during the group notice effect execution period.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 14-32, during the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, the revariable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the revariable display notification effect period from the speakers 8L and 8R. While the output of the BGM is limited, the output of the BGM from the speakers 8L and 8R is not limited during the variable display except for the revariable display notification effect period. Further, during the temporary stop suggestion effect period, two types of sounds, BGM and temporary stop suggestion sound, are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, while during the first variable display start number notification effect period, the speakers 8L and 8R output. In addition to the first variable display start count notification sound, a maximum of four types of sounds including BGM, cut-in notice effect sound, and group notice effect sound are output.

Next, a display mode of each image on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion effect period will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 14-33, in the temporary stop suggestion effect period when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the image display device 5 draws with the image data 2 from above to below in the image display device 5. The movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbol toward is executed. The movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbol is executed at a speed V1 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect period to the display image data switching timing. From the display image data switching timing, the pseudo-continuous symbol is not drawn as the image data 2, that is, from the display image data switching timing, the pseudo-continuous symbol as the image data 2 is hidden.

Further, from the middle of the movement display of the speed V1 of the pseudo-continuous symbol, the temporary stop suggestion image is displayed on the image display device 5 by drawing with the image data 1. The temporary stop suggestion image is displayed from the middle of the movement display of the speed V1 of the pseudo-continuous symbol described above to the period of the display image data switching timing, but is not displayed (hidden) in other periods.

Further, immediately before the display image data switching timing, the display of the pseudo-continuous symbol at the central portion of the image display device 5 is started by drawing with the image data 3. The pseudo-continuous symbol drawn by the image data 3 does not move until the display image data switching timing (speed 0), but from the display image data switching timing, the speed V1 described above is directed downward from the central portion of the image display device 5. The movement display is performed at a speed V3, which is faster than that. The movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbol at the speed V3 by drawing the image data 3 is hidden when the pseudo-continuous symbol moves out of the display area of the image display device 5.

Further, from the display image data switching timing, the moving display (variable display) of the decorative symbol from the upper side to the lower side in the image display device 5 is executed by drawing with the image data 2. The moving display (variable display) of the decorative symbol is executed at a speed V2 (speed: V3> V2> V1) which is faster than the speed V1 and slower than the speed V3 from the display image data switching timing. The moving display (variable display) of the decorative symbol continues until the start timing of the reach effect.

Then, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentrated lines are displayed on the image display device 5 by drawing with the image data 4. The display of the concentrated line is displayed at D2, which is a higher density than D1, after the density (display density) is displayed at D1 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect to a certain period. That is, the number of concentrated lines to be displayed increases as a certain period of time elapses from the start of display on the image display device 5. Then, the concentrated line is displayed again at the density D1 from the display image data switching timing and then disappears.

Therefore, in the temporary stop suggestion effect period in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is non-stop, the concentrated lines are displayed at the density D1 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect to the display image data switching timing, so that the left and right decorations are displayed. The visibility of the symbols (decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right") is lower than the state before the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect (visibility: high). (Visibility: Medium). Further, as the density of the concentrated lines changes from D1 to D2, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols (decorative symbols displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) becomes lower. (Visibility: low).

Further, from the display image data switching timing to the display end timing of the concentrated line, since the concentrated line is displayed at the density D1, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is higher than that when the concentrated line is displayed at the density D2. Higher (visibility: medium). Then, after the display end timing of the concentrated line, the display of the concentrated line is completed (hidden), so that the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is the highest (visibility: high).

As shown in FIGS. 14-34, in the temporary stop suggestion effect period when the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops, the image display device 5 draws with the image data 2 from the upper side to the lower side in the image display device 5. The movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbol of is executed. The movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbol is executed at a speed V1 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect period to the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect (temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol). The period required from the start timing of the variable display to the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol is the period required from the start timing of the variable display to the display image data switching timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol shown in FIGS. 14-33 does not temporarily stop. It is the same. Further, after the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the temporary stop notification effect is executed, but during the temporary stop notification effect execution period, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped (speed V0) in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. After that, it becomes hidden.

Further, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 by drawing with the image data 4. In the display of the concentrated line, the density of the concentrated line (display density) is displayed in D2 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect to the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect (temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol). , It will be hidden from the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect.

Then, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentrated lines are displayed on the image display device 5 by drawing with the image data 4. The display of the concentrated line is displayed at D2, which is a higher density than D1, after the density (display density) is displayed at D1 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect to a certain period. That is, the number of concentrated lines to be displayed increases as a certain period of time elapses from the start of display on the image display device 5. Then, the concentrated line is hidden from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol.

Therefore, in the temporary stop suggestion effect period in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is non-stop, the concentrated lines are displayed at the density D1 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect to the display image data switching timing, so that the left and right decorations are displayed. The visibility of the symbols (decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right") is lower than the state before the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect (visibility: high). (Visibility: Medium). Further, as the density of the concentrated lines changes from D1 to D2, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols (decorative symbols displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) becomes lower. (Visibility: low). Further, from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol, the display of the concentrated line is completed (not displayed), so that the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is the highest (visibility: high).

Although not shown in FIGS. 14-34, after the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, that is, during the temporary stop notification effect period, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and the decorative symbol is drawn by drawing the image data 1. The effect image for the temporary stop notification of is displayed around the pseudo-continuous pattern. The effect image for the temporary stop notification of the decorative symbol is then switched to the display in the entire display area of the image display device 5 (see FIGS. 14-35). The effect image for temporary stop notification in the feature unit 193SG is an image in which the transmittance is set to 0%.

That is, in the temporary stop notification effect period, once the concentrated line is hidden, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is higher than that in the temporary stop suggestion effect execution period (visibility: medium), but the image display device. The left and right decorative symbols become invisible due to the display of the effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of 5 (visibility: invisible).

However, from the timing at which the temporary stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol in the image data 2 ends, the speed V2 toward the player side (front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) of the pseudo-continuous symbol is also drawn by drawing the image data 2. The movement display is executed. At this time, since the movement display (enlarged display) of the pseudo-continuous symbols is executed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, the left and right pseudo-continuous symbols become invisible again.

When the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped in the temporary stop suggestion effect, the moving display of the pseudo-continuous symbol on the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 3 and the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 2 The moving display of the decorative pattern is not executed (variable display).

Next, a display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display for executing the temporary stop suggestion effect in the feature unit 193SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-35 to 14-47.

First, when it is decided not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect at the start of the variable display, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (A) to 14-35 (C), a certain period of time has passed from the start of the variable display. After that, the decorative symbols stop (swing stop) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C of the "left" and "right" to reach the reach. After that, as the first temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol moves from above to below at a speed V1 in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. At this time, in the image display device 5, a concentrated line is displayed from the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 toward the central portion (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) of the image display device 5. The concentrated line is displayed at the density D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 with the lapse of a certain period of time.

Then, when the variable display is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 out of the normal reach that does not execute the pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (D). At speed V2, it moves below the image display device and disappears. At this time, the density of the concentrated lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variation pattern (any of PA2-2 to PA2-4 and PB1-2 to PB1-4) that executes a pseudo-continuous effect, as shown in FIG. 14-35 (E). At the same time, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol. In addition, the concentrated line is hidden. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect. Further, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits blue light.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (F) and 14-35 (G), the effect image for temporary stop notification is switched to the display in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the left and right decorative symbols are displayed. It becomes invisible to the player, and the blue light emission by the second movable body 193SG033 ends. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (G) and 14-35 (H), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position, the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol has a plurality of symbols. The evacuation is displayed. After that, an image in which the pseudo-series symbol displaying these plurality of cracks explodes is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 14-36 (I) and 14-36 (J), the pseudo-series symbol is configured. An image is displayed in which the characters (in the case of the feature unit 193SG, each alphabet of "NEXT" indicating that the pseudo-continuous production is executed) are diffused and move toward the player side.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-37 (K) to 14-37 (P), the first revariable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, as a revariable display notification effect, the image of the character A is displayed on the image display device 5, and the revariable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, if it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect or the group notice effect at the start of the variable display, the cut-in notice effect or the cut-in notice effect overlaps with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect. A group notice production is executed.

Then, when the revariable display notification effect is completed, an image of "x2" is displayed on the image display device 5 as the first first variable display start number notification effect, and both left and right ends of the image display device 5 are displayed. The display of the blue effect image is started at. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position again and emits blue light.

The "x2" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the first variable display start number notification effect is once displayed on the image display device 5 and then displayed in a larger size and is not displayed. It becomes a display (see FIGS. 14-37 (O) and 14-37 (P)).

When the first variable display start number notification effect is completed, the second movable body 193SG033 ends its blue light emission, and the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position. Further, as the first second variable display start number notification effect, an image of "x2" having a size smaller than that of the first variable display start number notification effect is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5.

Shortly after the first second variable display start count notification effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. 14-38 (R) to 14-38 (T), the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas After the decorative symbol stopped (swinged and stopped) in 5L and 5R to reach the reach, the pseudo-continuous symbol was moved from the top to the bottom in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C as the second temporary stop suggestion effect. It moves at speed V1. At this time, in the image display device 5, a concentrated line is displayed from the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 toward the central portion (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) of the image display device 5. The concentrated line is displayed at the density D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 with the lapse of a certain period of time.

Then, when the variable display is the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 out of the normal reach or the fluctuation pattern PB1-2 of the normal reach jackpot that executes the pseudo-continuous effect only once, as shown in FIG. 14-38 (U). The pseudo-continuous symbol moves below the image display device at a speed of V2 without being temporarily stopped and is hidden. At this time, the density of the concentrated lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variation pattern (any of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4) in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice or more, FIG. 14-38 (V) As shown in the above, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol. In addition, the concentrated line is hidden. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect. Further, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits green light.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-38 (W) and 14-38 (X), the effect image for temporary stop notification is switched to the display in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the left and right decorative symbols are displayed. It becomes invisible to the player, and the green light emission by the second movable body 193SG033 ends. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-38 (X) and 14-38 (Y), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position, the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol has a plurality of symbols. The evacuation is displayed. After that, an image in which the pseudo-series symbol displaying these plurality of cracks explodes is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 14-39 (Z) and 14-39 (a), the pseudo-series symbol is configured. An image is displayed in which the characters (in the case of the feature unit 193SG, each alphabet of "NEXT" indicating that the pseudo-continuous production is executed) are diffused and move toward the player side.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-40 (b) to 14-40 (h), the second revariable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, as a revariable display notification effect, the image of the character B is displayed on the image display device 5, and the revariable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. If it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect or the group notice effect at the start of the variable display, the cut-in notice effect or the group will overlap with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect. Notice production is executed.

Then, when the revariable display notification effect is completed, an image of "x3" is displayed on the image display device 5 as the second first variable display start number notification effect, and both left and right ends of the image display device 5 are displayed. The display of the green effect image is started at. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position again and emits green light.

The "x3" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the second first variable display start count notification effect is displayed on the image display device 5 and then displayed in a larger size. It becomes a display (see FIG. 14-40 (f) and FIG. 14-40 (g)).

When the first variable display start number notification effect is completed, as the second second variable display start number notification effect, "x3" having a size smaller than that of the first variable display start number notification effect in the upper left portion of the image display device 5. Image is displayed.

After a while after the second variable display start count notification effect is completed, the decorative symbol display areas of "left" and "right" are shown in FIGS. 14-41 (e) to 14-41 (g). After the decorative symbol stopped (swinged and stopped) in 5L and 5R to reach the reach, the pseudo-continuous symbol was moved from the top to the bottom in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C as the third temporary stop suggestion effect. It moves at speed V1. At this time, in the image display device 5, a concentrated line is displayed from the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 toward the central portion (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) of the image display device 5. The concentrated line is displayed at the density D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 with the lapse of a certain period of time.

Then, when the variable display is a fluctuation pattern PA2-3 out of super reach or a fluctuation pattern PB1-3 of super reach jackpot that executes the pseudo-continuous effect only twice, as shown in FIG. 14-41 (h). In addition, the pseudo-continuous symbol moves below the image display device at a speed of V2 without being temporarily stopped and is hidden. At this time, the density of the concentrated lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variation pattern (any of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4) in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice or more, FIG. 14-41 (i) As shown in the above, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol. In addition, the concentrated line is hidden. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect. Further, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits red light.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-41 (j) and 14-41 (k), the effect image for temporary stop notification is switched to the display in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the left and right decorative symbols are displayed. It becomes invisible to the player, and the red light emission by the second movable body 193SG033 ends. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-41 (k) and 14-41 (l), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position, the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol has a plurality of symbols. The evacuation is displayed. After that, an image in which the pseudo-series symbol displaying these plurality of cracks explodes is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 14-42 (m) and 14-42 (n), the pseudo-series symbol is configured. An image is displayed in which the characters (in the case of the feature unit 193SG, each alphabet of "NEXT" indicating that the pseudo-continuous production is executed) are diffused and move toward the player side.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-43 (o) to 14-43 (u), the third revariable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, as a revariable display notification effect, the image of the character C is displayed on the image display device 5, and the revariable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. If it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect or the group notice effect at the start of the variable display, the cut-in notice effect or the group will overlap with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect. Notice production is executed.

Then, when the revariable display notification effect is completed, an image of "x4" is displayed on the image display device 5 as the third first variable display start number notification effect, and both left and right ends of the image display device 5 are displayed. The display of the red effect image is started at. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position again and emits red light.

The "x4" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the third variable display start count notification effect is displayed in a larger size after being displayed on the image display device 5 once. (See FIGS. 14-43 (s) and 14-43 (t)).

When the first variable display start number notification effect is completed, as the third second variable display start number notification effect, "x4" having a size smaller than the first variable display start number notification effect in the upper left portion of the image display device 5. Image is displayed.

Here, the time when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIGS. 14-44 (A) and 14-44 (B), when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the pseudo-continuous symbol is directed from the upper side to the lower side at the speed V1 in the image display device 5 as described above. The concentrated line is displayed at the density D2. When the pseudo-continuous symbol approaches the temporary stop position as the temporary stop suggestion effect progresses, the speed V1 is directed from above to below at the center of the image display device 5 (temporary stop position of the decorative symbol). A pseudo-series symbol (pseudo-series symbol by drawing with image data 3) different from the pseudo-series symbol (pseudo-series symbol drawn with image data 2) that moves in is displayed, suggesting a temporary stop of the pseudo-series symbol. NS.

Then, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped as shown in FIGS. 14-44 (C), so that the temporary stop notification is given around the pseudo-ream symbol. The effect image for Lights up in green for a temporary stop and red for the third temporary stop). Further, the concentrated line displayed on the image display device 5 at this time is hidden.

On the other hand, when the decorative symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 14-44 (D) and 14-44 (E), the pseudo-continuous symbol in the center of the image display device 5 (Pseudo-continuous symbol drawn by image data 3) is hidden, and the pseudo-continuous symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol drawn by image data 2) that had been moving from above to downward at speed V1 is displayed. It passes through the temporary stop position at a speed of V2, moves downward of the image display device 5 as it is, and is hidden. At the same time, the normal movement display of the decorative symbol is executed from the upper side to the lower side of the image display device 5 (variable display is executed).

The density of the concentrated lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1 from the timing when the movement of the pseudo-continuous symbol at the speed V2 is started (the number of concentrated lines displayed decreases). Then, the concentrated line after the density changes to D1 is hidden after a certain period of time after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden from the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 14-44 (F) and 14-44 (G), after the concentrated lines are hidden, the decorations excluding the pseudo-continuous symbols are removed for a while in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. After the variable display is executed on the symbol, the reach effect according to the variable pattern is executed, and finally the decorative symbol indicating the big hit or the miss is derived and displayed (in the case of this feature unit 193SG, "medium"). In the decorative symbol display area 5C, the decorative symbols of numbers other than "1", which is a combination of big hits, or "1", which is a combination of outliers, are stopped). That is, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped in the temporary stop suggestion effect, the display of the concentrated line is continued even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden from the image display device 5, but the concentrated line is displayed. The display is hidden before the decorative symbol stops due to a combination of big hits or misses (more accurately, before the reach effect is started).

As described above, regarding the variable display when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed, as shown in FIGS. 14-45, the left and right decorative symbols (“right” and “left” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) The displayed decorative pattern) has lower visibility during the temporary stop suggestion effect period than before the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed because the concentrated lines are displayed at the density D1 (visibility: low). .. Further, the left and right decorative symbols (decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "right" and "left") are further reduced in visibility by changing to the density D2 of the concentrated lines (visual recognition). Gender: Medium).

Further, for the left and right decorative symbols during the temporary stop notification effect period, an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed around the pseudo-continuous symbol from the start timing of the temporary stop notification effect (temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol). The visibility is higher during the period during which the temporary stop is suggested than during the period (visibility: medium).

After the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 during the temporary stop notification effect period, the remaining temporary stop notification effect period (the player side of the pseudo-continuous pattern). (Movement display toward) and revariable display It becomes invisible to the player during the notification effect period.

Then, from the start timing of the variable display start number notification effect, the left and right decorative symbols are displayed again on the image display device. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped due to the partial overlap of the displays such as "x2", "x3", and "x4" displayed in the center of the image display device 5. The visibility is the same as immediately after the start of (Visibility: Medium).

After that, the left and right decorative patterns are enlarged and displayed as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. (moved toward the player side) so that they cannot be seen by the player. After that, the display of these "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. is switched to the small display at the upper left part of the image display device 5, so that the state with the highest visibility (visibility: high). It becomes.

In the feature unit 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 14-36 to 14-37, 14-39 to 14-40, and 14-42 to 14-43, the execution period of the temporary stop notification effect is set. Although the mode in which the execution period of the revariable display notification effect is different (the revariable display notification effect is executed after the execution of the temporary stop notification effect) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and these provisional display notification effects are not limited thereto. The execution period of the stop notification effect and the execution period of the revariable display notification effect may partially overlap. For example, as shown in FIGS. 14-36 to 14-37, when the pseudo-continuous symbol explodes and is moved to the front side in the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect, a part of the pseudo-continuous symbol ( For example, the character "E") is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 and then erased, while the character as a revariable display notification effect on the back side of a part of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The display of the image of is started. By doing so, the image of the character is gradually made visible to the player in the process of erasing the pseudo-continuous symbol, and the effect of the effect can be improved, and further, the image is displayed on the image display device 5. It is possible to transfer the images that are displayed without any discomfort.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (H) and the like, the feature unit 193SG displays an image in which the pseudo-continuous symbol has a crack in the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect, and the image itself explodes. Although the display mode has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image containing these cracks and the image exploding may be different from each other. For example, as a temporary stop notification effect, the image display device 5 displays an image in which a ridge is included in the pseudo-continuous pattern, and then displays an image in which smoke or light is generated from the ridge. Then, the pseudo-continuous symbol may be difficult to see from the player by the image of the smoke or light, and an exploding image may be displayed instead of the pseudo-continuous symbol. By doing so, it is possible to transfer the image displayed on the image display device 5 without discomfort.

Next, when it is decided to execute the special temporary stop notification effect at the start of the variable display, as shown in FIGS. 14-46 (A) to 14-46 (C), the variable display is started for a while. Become a reach. Then, as the first temporary stop suggestion effect, the movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbol indicating the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is executed at a lower speed (speed V1) than usual in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. Then, at the same time as the temporary stop re-effect period ends, the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect.

As shown in FIGS. 14-46 (D) to 14-46 (H), when the output of the temporary stop notification sound is completed, the image display device 5 starts displaying the first special background image, and the first time. The revariable display of the decorative pattern of is started. At this time, if it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect or the group notice effect at the start of the variable display, the cut-in notice effect or the group notice effect is executed in duplicate with the revariable display notification effect.

Then, when the cut-in effect and the group notice effect are completed, the first variable display start number notification effect is executed without executing the first variable display start number notification effect.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 14-47 (I) to 14-47 (N), the first special background displayed on the image display device 5 by executing the second temporary stop of the decorative symbol. The image is displayed on the second special background image, and the re-variable display of the decorative pattern, the cut-in notice effect, the group notice effect, the second second variable display start count notification effect are executed, and the third decorative pattern is displayed. By executing the temporary stop, the second special background image displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed on the third special background image, and the decorative pattern is revariably displayed, the cut-in notice effect, the group notice effect, and the like. The third variable display start number notification effect is executed. Then, the reach effect is executed, and the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit or a miss.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 14-33 and 14-34, the concentrated line is displayed at the density D1 on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect. By doing so, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is reduced, and then the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D2, so that the pseudo-continuous symbol is produced by the temporary stop suggestion effect. It is possible to raise the player's expectation for the temporary stop. Then, as the temporary stop notification effect, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative symbols invisible, so that the pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. It is possible to enhance the feeling of exhilaration.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-44, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the concentrated line continues even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. If the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the concentrated line is continuously displayed even after the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol should have been temporarily stopped, so that the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops. It becomes easier for the player to recognize that there was no such thing, and the player's disappointment about the fact that the pseudo-ream symbol did not temporarily stop can be alleviated, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-33, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the concentrated line is displayed at the density D2 before the switching timing of the display image data, and the switching timing of the display image data is displayed. After that, since the concentrated lines are displayed at the density D1, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is higher after the display image data switching timing than before the display image data switching timing. That is, after the switching timing of the display image data, by increasing the transparency of the concentrated line, the player is made to recognize that the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, and the attention to the background image is increased through the concentrated line. As a result, it is possible to alleviate the player's disappointment that the pseudo-ream pattern did not temporarily stop.

If the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, before the decorative symbol of the combination that becomes a big hit or misses together with the left and right decorative symbols is stopped in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. Since the concentrated line is hidden in, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the stop of the decorative symbol after the pseudo-continuous symbol has not been temporarily stopped is a temporary stop.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (G) to 14-35 (H), when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and at the same time, Since the image display device 5 displays an image in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is cracked and explodes (an image in which the pseudo-continuous symbol moves toward the player side), the operation of the second movable body 193SG033 and the pseudo-continuous symbol are displayed. The display of the explosion can further impress the player that the pseudo-ream symbol has been temporarily stopped.

In particular, in the present feature unit 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position as a temporary stop notification effect, so that the pseudo-continuous symbol and the pseudo-continuous symbol are viewed from the front. Since a part of the second movable body 193SG033 overlaps, the player is informed that the pseudo-ream symbol has been temporarily stopped while preventing the pseudo-ream symbol from becoming difficult for the player to see due to the second movable body 193SG033. Can make an impression.

In addition, in this feature part 193SG, the form in which the pseudo-continuous symbol explodes is illustrated as an example in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is deformed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as an example in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is deformed, , The pseudo-continuous symbol may change to the shape of a specific figure (for example, a circle or a triangle), or the size of the pseudo-continuous symbol may be different from that before the temporary stop.

Further, the feature unit 193SG exemplifies a mode in which the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the retracted position to the first effect position when the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the movable body 32 is placed in the first effect position or a position different from the first effect position in addition to or in place of the second movable body 193SG033, and is viewed from the front. May be moved to a position that overlaps with at least a part of the pseudo-continuous symbol.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (F) and 14-35 (G), in the temporary stop notification effect, the second movable body 193SG033 is displayed before the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. Since it is moved from the first effect position to the retracted position, the movement of the second movable body 193SG033 makes it easier for the player to recognize that the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden from the image display device 5.

Further, in the variable display of the feature unit 193SG, it is possible to execute the pseudo-ream effect up to three times, and every time the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped and the revariable display is executed as these pseudo-ream effects, the first is performed. As the 1 variable display start number notification effect, the image display device 5 displays displays such as "x2", "x3", and "x4" according to the revariable display number. Further, as shown in FIG. 14-37 (O), when the first variable display start number notification effect is executed, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and becomes the second movable body 193SG033. Since some of the displays such as "x2", "x3", and "x4" are overlapped in the front view, "x2", "x3", and so on according to the variable number of times of display. It is possible to attract attention to the display such as "x4" and improve the effect of the effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-37 (O), 14-40 (f), and 14-43 (s), when "x2" is displayed as the variable display start number notification effect, the second movable is possible. The first variable display start count is obtained by making the body 193SG033 emit light in blue, the second movable body 193SG033 in green when displaying "x3", and the second movable body 193SG033 in red when displaying "x4". It is possible to attract the player's attention to the display of the notification effect, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

In the feature unit 193SG, when the first variable display start number notification effect is executed, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and the second movable body 193SG033 and "x2", ". Although a form in which a part of the display such as "x3" or "x4" is overlapped in the front view is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution of the first variable display start number notification effect is executed. Occasionally, the display of the second movable body 193SG033 and the display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. may completely overlap.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-33, 14-35, and 14-44, as the temporary stop suggestion performance, a concentrated line is displayed in the central portion of the image display device 5 while displaying a pseudo continuous symbol as a temporary stop suggestion image. Is displayed, so that the display control of the temporary stop suggestion effect by the effect control CPU 120 becomes easy, and when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the image data is switched at the display image data switching timing (shown in FIG. 14-3). It is possible to prevent the switching from the image data to the image data shown in FIG. 14-4) to be unnatural. In particular, after the display image data switching timing, the pseudo-continuous symbol moves downward from the central portion of the image display device 5, so that the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in advance in the central portion of the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion image. By setting the image data, the image data can be switched at the display image data switching timing in a different manner that gives the player a feeling of strangeness.

Further, in the gaming machine of the feature unit 193SG, the effect control CPU 120 is drawn as image data 1, image data 2, image data 3, and image data 4 as shown in FIGS. 14-3 and 14-4. The data can be combined and the image can be displayed on the image display device 5. In particular, the pseudo-continuous symbol as a temporarily stopped image is drawn as the image data 1 having the highest display priority, and the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol is drawn as the image data 2 having a lower display priority than the image data 1, and is temporarily stopped. Since the concentrated line as the stop suggestion effect is drawn as the image data 4 having the lowest display priority, the decorative symbol or pseudo-continuous symbol during moving display (variable display), the pseudo-continuous symbol as a temporary stop suggestion image, and provisional It is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the concentrated line as a stop suggestion effect.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (H), 14-36 (I), and 14-36 (J), a pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. When the display explodes and moves to the front side, the left and right decorative symbols are invisible to the player, while the first variable display start count notification effect is shown as shown in FIG. 14-37 (O). When "x2" or the like is displayed on the image display device 5, since the left and right decorative symbols are visible to the player, the temporary stop notification effect and the first variable display start number notification effect (particularly). The effect of (displaying "x2", etc.) can be enhanced, and the left and right decorative symbols can be visually recognized by the player during the first variable display start count notification effect, so that the revariable display is executed. Can be easily recognized by the player.

Further, a portion in which the pseudo-continuous symbols shown in FIGS. 14-35 (H), 14-36 (I), 14-36 (J) and the like explode and are moved and displayed, and 14-37 (O), The parts where the displays such as "x2", "x3", and "x4" shown in FIGS. 14-37 (P) are moved and displayed are both moved displays (enlarged display) toward the player side. ), Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the temporary stop notification effect and the first variable display start number notification effect by the movement display toward the player side.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-33, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the display image data switching timing is V1, but the pseudo-continuous symbol after the display image data switching timing is pseudo. Since the moving speed of the continuous symbol is V3, the player decides whether the pseudo continuous symbol is before or after the timing of temporary stop by the moving speed of the pseudo continuous symbol (before or after the display image data switching timing). It is possible for the player to easily grasp (whether it will be later).

In this feature unit 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the display image data switching timing is the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol after the display image data switching timing. Although the embodiment is slower than the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and the moving speed of the pseudo-ream symbol before the display image data switching timing is the pseudo-ream after the display image data switching timing. It may be faster than the moving speed of the symbol.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-34, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol is V1, but the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. Since the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol after the timing is V2, the player determines whether the movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbol is before or after the temporary stop depending on the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol. Can be easily grasped.

In particular, in this feature unit 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35, the pseudo-continuous symbol before the temporary stop moves from the upper side to the lower side, but the pseudo-continuous symbol after the temporary stop is a player. Since it moves toward the side (front side), the player can more easily understand whether it is before the temporary stop or after the temporary stop depending on the moving direction of the pseudo-continuous symbol, and the movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbol can be displayed. Misidentification can be prevented.

It should be noted that the feature unit 193SG exemplifies a mode in which the movement directions of the pseudo-linkage symbols are different before and after the pseudo-linkage symbol is temporarily stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-linkage symbol is not limited to this. The moving direction of the pseudo-continuous symbol may be the same before the temporary stop of the continuous symbol and after the temporary stop. Further, if the moving direction of the pseudo-continuous symbol after the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped is different from the moving direction of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the temporary stop, the movement does not have to be toward the player side (front side). good.

In this feature unit 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the display image data switching timing is the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol after the display image data switching timing. Although a slower form has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the image of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the display image data switching timing is displayed. The number of display frames for displaying the pseudo-continuous symbol after the display image data switching timing may be different from the number of display frames for displaying. If the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the period during which the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed before the display image data switching timing (the effect period during which the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed) and the display image data switching The period during which the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed after the timing may be different. That is, in the present invention, "the moving speed at which the specific effect identification information (pseudo-ream symbol in the feature unit 193SG) moves is different" means that the number of display frames for displaying the pseudo-ream symbol is different, and the pseudo-ream is different. The period during which the symbol is displayed (the production period during which the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed) is also included.

Although the feature portion 193SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and even if there are changes or additions within the range not deviating from the gist of the present invention, the present invention includes them. ..

For example, in the feature unit 193SG, the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in the central portion of the image display device 5 (the decorative symbol display area 5C of the “middle”) by displaying the concentrated lines on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion effect. Although a mode in which the player pays attention to whether or not to temporarily stop is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. 14-48 (A) to 14-48 as a modified example 193SG-1. As shown in (D), a concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion effect, and the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect (pseudo-continuous symbol moves toward the center of the image display device 5). ), The concentrated line may be moved and displayed toward the central portion of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can identify that the pseudo-continuous symbol may stop at the central portion of the image display device 5. Therefore, if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the game It is possible to make it easier for the person to recognize that the temporary stop was not performed.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, a concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, and when the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, a color corresponding to the number of temporary stops is displayed. Although the embodiment in which the second movable body 193SG033 (second movable body LED293SG034) is made to emit light is illustrated in the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 193SG-2, when a temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. In the image display device 5, a concentrated line may be displayed in a color corresponding to the number of times the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. For example, the concentrated line is displayed in blue when the first temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the concentrated line is displayed in green when the second temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, and the concentrated line is displayed in red when the third temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. .. By doing so, when the second movable body 193SG033 is made to emit light as a temporary stop notification effect, the second movable body 193SG033 is emitted in the same color as the concentrated line displayed as the temporary stop suggestion effect. The effect can be improved.

Further, the feature unit 193SG exemplifies a mode in which a cut-in notice effect and a group notice effect can be executed as a notice effect suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit during the variable display, but the present invention is limited to this. As a modified example 193SG-3, the display mode of the decorative symbol is changed or changed from, for example, the start timing of the variable display or the re-variable display timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. It may be possible to execute an effect that changes the display direction.

In this way, when it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the decorative pattern or changing the direction of the variable display as a notice effect, the first variable display start count notification effect is "x2" or "x". When the display of "3" and "x4" is moved and displayed (enlarged display) toward the player side, the execution of the advance notice effect may be restricted. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming unable to recognize that the revariable display is executed by executing the advance notice effect.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 executes revariable display without displaying an image that impairs the visibility of the pseudo-continuous symbol from the player. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 193SG-4, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the visibility of the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stopped in the image display device 5 is improved. A reduced visibility-inhibiting image (for example, an image of a blast) may be displayed, the visibility-inhibiting image may be hidden, and then revariable display may be executed. By doing so, the visibility-impaired image is displayed before the revariable display is executed, so that it is easy to understand that the revariable display is executed.

Further, a light guide plate which is a transparent plate material and can display the above-mentioned visibility-inhibiting image by injecting light from the outer peripheral side surface is provided on the front side (image display device) of the image display device 5 in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be provided at a position) between 5 and the player. By doing so, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the visibility-inhibiting image is displayed on the light guide plate, so that the pseudo-continuous symbol displayed on the image display device 5 is difficult for the player to see, and the player's The impression can be enhanced, and the effect of producing an image with impaired visibility can be enhanced.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop at the central portion of the image display device 5, the pseudo-continuous symbol is always moved and displayed downward of the image display device 5 and hidden. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 193SG-5, even if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop at the central portion of the image display device 5, it is simulated. A case may be provided in which the continuous symbols once start moving downward of the image display device 5 and then return to the central portion of the image display device 5 to temporarily stop. In this case, the movement speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the display image data switching timing and the movement of the pseudo-continuous symbol when returning to the central portion of the image display device 5 after passing through the central portion of the image display device 5 once. By making the speed different, it is easy for the player to grasp whether the pseudo-continuous symbol has passed the central portion of the image display device 5 or has once passed the central portion of the image display device 5. You may.

Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol once passes through the central portion of the image display device 5 and then returns to the central portion of the image display device 5, the display of the concentrated line may not be executed again. By doing so, it is possible for the player to more easily understand that the pseudo-continuous symbol once passes through the central portion of the image display device 5 and then returns to the central portion of the image display device 5.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, the pseudo-continuous effect can be executed up to three times during the variable display, and when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice. Although the embodiment in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed is illustrated as in the case of the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo continuous effect is performed the maximum number of times during the variable display (if the feature unit 193SG is used). When executed (3 times), the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit is higher than the reach effect different from the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed less than the maximum number of times during the variable display (for example, the reach effect of other super reach). High full rotation reach effect, etc.) may be executed. When the pseudo continuous effect is executed the maximum number of times during the variable display in this way, the full rotation reach effect is executed without going through the revariable display notification effect after the temporary stop notification effect. good.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, as a pseudo-ream effect, a pseudo-ream symbol is displayed in the center (“middle” decorative symbol display area 5C) in a state where the symbols showing the same numerical value on the left and right decorative symbols are stopped (reach state). Although the form of temporary stop is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous symbol may be temporarily stopped in a state other than the reach state. Further, as described above, as the pseudo-ream effect, a decorative symbol different from the pseudo-ream symbol may be temporarily stopped in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. As for the form in which a decorative symbol different from the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display area 5C of "middle" as a pseudo-continuous effect, an odd-numbered or even-numbered combination such as "135" or "246", "112" The decorative design may be temporarily stopped by a specific combination such as a combination of so-called misalignment such as "334" or "334".

(Explanation of Feature 225SG in Embodiment of the Present Invention)
Next, the feature portion 225SG (hereinafter, referred to as the present feature portion 225SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. In this feature unit 225SG, the description of the portion having the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature portion described above will be omitted.

The gaming machine of Form 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) for the player.
A display means capable of displaying an effect image (for example, an image display device 5) and
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect) suggesting that the specific image displayed on the display means is controlled to the advantageous state. The part that executes the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 13) and
With
The suggestion effect execution means
A pre-stage effect of moving and displaying the specific image (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 15-4 (C) to 15-4 (E))
As shown in FIGS. 15-4 (G) to 15-4 (H), the pseudo-continuous symbol is provisional, which is a successful mode in which the specific image is stopped and displayed after the first stage effect is executed. The part to stop) and
After executing the first stage effect, the second second stage effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (F)), which is a failure mode in which the movement display of the specific image is continued, continues without temporarily stopping. The part that is moved and displayed and hidden) and can be executed,
It is a feature part.
According to this feature, it becomes easy to grasp the success and failure of the suggestion production, and the interest of the suggestion production can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is
In the first stage effect, a semi-transparent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-1, concentrated lines having a transmittance of 50% are displayed with priority over decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols. The part to be done)
In the first subsequent stage effect, when the specific image is stopped and displayed, an opaque effect display is displayed, so that the specific image is once difficult to see (for example, shown in FIG. 15-4 (G)). (The part where the effect image for temporary stop notification with 0% transmittance is displayed),
In the second subsequent stage effect, the opaque effect display is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (F), if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the effect image for temporary stop notification is not displayed. part),
The gaming machine according to the first embodiment, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that.
According to this feature, by displaying the semi-transparent effect display, it is possible to improve the interest of the previous stage production in which it is unclear whether or not the moving display specific image is stopped and displayed, and the specific image is stopped. Since it becomes difficult to visually recognize when the image is displayed, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort at the time of the stop display and emphasize that the stop display is performed, so that the interest of the subsequent production can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is
In the first stage effect, an effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-5 as a modified example 225SG-1, a decorative symbol or a pseudo-continuous symbol has priority over a concentrated line. Displayed part),
When the first second stage effect is executed, the opaque effect display is displayed when the first second stage effect is executed, so that the specific image is once difficult to see (for example, FIG. 15-6). As shown in (G), the part where the effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% is displayed),
When the second subsequent stage effect is executed, the opaque effect display is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-6 (F), when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the effect for temporary stop notification is not displayed. The part where the image is not displayed),
The gaming machine according to the first embodiment, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that.
According to this feature, by displaying the effect display on the background side of the specific image, it is possible to improve the interest of the pre-stage effect in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being moved and displayed is stopped and displayed. Since it is difficult to see the image when it is stopped and displayed, it is possible to reduce the discomfort at the time of the stopped display and emphasize that the image is stopped and displayed, so that the interest of the subsequent production can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is
In the first stage effect, an effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-5 as a modified example 225SG-1, a decorative symbol or a pseudo-continuous symbol has priority over a concentrated line. Displayed part),
In the second subsequent stage effect, the effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image even before the failure mode occurs, and the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period even after the specific image is erased. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-7 (F) to 15-7 (H) as a modified example 225SG-2, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the image is displayed by the moving display of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed even after it is hidden by the device 5),
The gaming machine according to the first embodiment, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that.
According to this feature, by displaying the effect display on the background side of the specific image, it is possible to improve the interest of the pre-stage effect in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being moved and displayed is stopped and displayed. (2) Also in the latter stage production, the interest of the latter stage production can be improved by displaying the effect display from before the failure mode to a predetermined period after the specific image is deleted.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is
In the first stage effect, a semi-transparent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-1, concentrated lines having a transmittance of 50% have priority over decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols. Displayed part),
In the second subsequent stage effect, the semi-transparent effect display is displayed on the specific image even before the failure mode occurs, and the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period even after the specific image is erased. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-8 (F) to 15-8 (H) as a modified example 225SG-3, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the image is displayed by moving the pseudo-continuous symbol. The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed even after it is hidden by the display device 5),
The gaming machine according to the first embodiment, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that.
According to this feature, by displaying the semi-transparent effect display on the specific image, it is possible to improve the interest of the pre-stage production in which it is unclear whether or not the moving display specific image is stopped and displayed. Also in the second latter stage production, the interest of the latter stage production can be improved by displaying the effect display from before the failure mode to a predetermined period after the specific image is erased.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is
In the pre-stage effect, a semi-transparent, highly transparent, highly transparent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-1, concentrated lines having a transmittance of 50% are decorative patterns or pseudo-reams. The part that is displayed with priority over the design),
In the first subsequent stage effect, when the specific image is stopped and displayed, a low-transparency effect display having a lower transparency than the high-transparency effect display is displayed, so that the specific image is temporarily difficult to see. (For example, as shown in FIG. 15-9 as a modified example 225SG-4, the decorative symbol or the pseudo continuous symbol is displayed by displaying the effect image for temporary stop notification having a transmittance of 20% on the image display device 5. The part that is difficult for the player to see),
In the second subsequent stage effect, the low-transparency effect display is not displayed (for example, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the effect of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5. Is not displayed),
The gaming machine according to the first embodiment, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that.
According to this feature, by displaying the highly transparent effect display, it is possible to improve the interest of the previous stage production in which it is unclear whether or not the moving display specific image is stopped and displayed, and the specific image is stopped. By displaying the low-transparency effect display when it is displayed, it is possible to reduce the discomfort at the time of the stop display and emphasize that the stop display is displayed, so that the interest of the subsequent production can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 7 is
The first second-stage effect includes an effect in which the size of the specific image is enlarged beyond the size in the first-stage effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-1 and 15-2, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. If you do, the pseudo-continuous symbol after the temporary stop is displayed in a larger size than the temporary stop),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 2 to Form 6, characterized in that.
According to this feature, the visibility of the stopped display specific image can be improved, and the stopped display can be further emphasized.

The gaming machine of Form 8 is
The degree of emphasis of the effect display in the pre-stage effect increases with the progress of the pre-stage effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-4 (C) to 15-4 (E), the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect. The concentrated line is moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the above),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 2 to Form 7, characterized in that.
According to this feature, it is possible to raise the expectation that the specific image is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the previous stage production.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is
It is provided with a notice effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13) capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that a specific event will occur.
During the period in which the effect display is displayed in the first second stage effect and the second second stage effect, the execution of the advance notice effect is restricted (for example, as a modification 225SG-5, an image display device as a temporary stop notification effect). When the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in 5, the part that restricts the execution of the notice effect),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 2 to Form 8, characterized in that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the advance notice effect from being lowered by the effect and the interest of the notice effect from being lowered.

The gaming machine of form 10 is
The suggestion effect execution means
As the suggestion effect, a first specific image (for example, an image having a left-right width dimension of L1 as a pseudo-continuous suggestion effect) is displayed on the display means, and the first stage effect and the first second stage effect or the front stage effect and the above. The first suggestion effect (for example, the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect shown in FIG. 15-11 (C) as the modified example 225SG-5) and the display means have a smaller display dimension than the first specific image. A second specific image (for example, an image of an arrow whose left-right width dimension is L2 (L1> L2) as an active display change suggestion effect) is displayed, and the first stage effect and the first second stage effect or the first stage effect and the first stage effect. 2 It is possible to execute the second suggestion effect (for example, the active display change suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 15-11 (D) to 15-11 (F) as the modified example 225SG-5) in which the latter stage effect is performed.
When the first post-stage effect is executed as the first suggestion effect, an opaque effect display or a low-transparency effect display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-11 (B), in the image display device 5 A part that displays an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% along with an image as a pseudo-continuous suggestion effect),
When the first subsequent effect is executed as the second suggestive effect, the opaque effect display or the low-transparency effect display is not displayed (for example, FIGS. 15-11 (D) to 15-11 (F)). As shown in the above, the part in which the image of the arrow is displayed as the active display change notice effect in the image display device 5, but the effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% is not displayed),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 2 to Form 9, characterized in that.
According to this feature, in the second suggestion effect, the opaque effect display or the low-transparency effect display is not displayed when the first subsequent effect is executed, so that the second specific image having a small display dimension can be understood by the effect display. It is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult.

First, the display control unit 123 in the feature unit 225SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying an image on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 can display a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on the image data of 1 stored in the CGROM based on the instruction by the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not displayed on the image display device 5, the image of the predetermined image is arranged by arranging other image data on the front side of the image data of the predetermined image with a transparency of 0% depending on the situation. The predetermined image is not displayed on the effect screen by controlling the image based on the data so as not to be displayed on the effect screen and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as such.

As shown in FIGS. 15-1 (A) to 15-1 (C), FIGS. 15-2 (A) to 15-2 (C), and FIGS. 15-3 (A) to 15-3 (C). In addition, for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the display data created by arranging a plurality of image data including the image data 1 to 4. Of these, FIG. 15-1 shows image data immediately before the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops as a temporary stop suggestion effect in the feature unit 225SG, and FIG. 15-2 shows image data when the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops. Yes, FIG. 15-3 is image data when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop.

As shown in FIG. 15-2 (A), the image data 1 is an effect image (temporary stop notification) for notifying that the pseudo-continuous symbol has been temporarily stopped in the entire display area of the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. This is the data drawn to display the effect image).

As shown in FIG. 15-1 (A), the image data 2 is obtained from the outer peripheral edge of the image display device 5 to the central portion of the image display device 5 (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) as a temporary stop suggestion effect. It is the data drawn to display the concentrated line toward.

As shown in FIGS. 15-1 (B), 15-2 (B), and 15-3 (A), the image data 3 displays the pseudo-continuous symbol on the image display device 5 during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. It is data drawn to display the movement display from the upper side to the lower side. Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the size of the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol is larger than that during the moving display (as shown in FIG. 15-1 (B), the left and right of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the temporary stop). The width dimension is a and the vertical width dimension is b. As shown in FIG. 15-2 (B), the horizontal width dimension of the pseudo-continuous symbol at the time of temporary stop is x (x> a), and the vertical width dimension is y. The data is drawn for display in (y> b)), and immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stopping, the image display device 5 replaces the pseudo-continuous symbol with the pseudo-continuous symbol. This is data drawn to display a variable display of a normal decorative symbol (designs "1" to "9" in the feature unit 225SG) from the upper side to the lower side.

As shown in FIG. 15-3 (B), the image data 4 is simulated from the central portion of the image display device 5 downward immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol. This is data drawn to display the moving display of the continuous pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 15-1 to 15-3, display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5 are set in these image data 1 to 4. Image data 1 is set to have the highest display priority. Further, the display priority of the image data 2 is set lower than that of the image data 1, and the display priority of the image data 3 is set lower than that of the image data 2. The display priority of the image data 4 is set to be the lowest (image display priority in the image display device 5: image data 1> image data 2> image data 3> image data 4). That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as an image lower than the image based on the image data 1, and is based on the image data 3. The image is displayed as an image lower than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2, and the image based on the image data 4 is based on the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2 and the image data 3. It is displayed as an image below the image.

Therefore, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 15-1 (C), the image (concentrated line) based on the image data 2 is changed to the image based on the image data 3 (from above to below the pseudo-continuous symbol). It is displayed with priority over (moving display toward). Since the concentrated line in the feature unit 225SG is set to have a high transmittance (for example, 50%), the player can draw a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern through the concentrated line during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. It is visible.

Immediately after the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIGS. 15-2 (C) and 15-2 (D), the image based on the image data 1 (effect image for temporary stop notification) is the image data 3. It is displayed with priority over the image based on (a pseudo-continuous pattern whose size is larger than that during the moving display due to the temporary stop). The effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden when a predetermined period elapses before the start of the revariable display.

The transmittance of the effect image for temporary stop notification in the feature unit 225SG is set to 0%. That is, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIGS. 15-2 (C) and 15-2 (D), the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. As a result, the decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols become invisible to the player, but after a predetermined period of time, these decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols become visible to the player.

Immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stopping, as shown in FIG. 15-3 (C), the image based on the image data 3 (variable display of the decorative symbol different from the pseudo-continuous symbol). ) Is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 4 (moving display from the center of the pseudo-continuous pattern image display device 5 downward).

In particular, in the feature unit 225SG, during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. 15-1 on the image display device 5, thereby performing a pseudo-ream. The player is made to pay attention to whether or not the symbol is temporarily stopped.

Further, in the variable display for executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) temporarily stops the pseudo-continuous symbol regardless of whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops at the start timing of the variable display. The image data to be stopped is set and the variable display is executed. Then, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) sets the image display device 5 at the display image data switching timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect in which the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop (see FIG. 14-33 of the above-mentioned feature unit 193). The image data displayed in 1 is switched from the image data (FIGS. 15-1 and 15-2) in which the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops to the image data in which the pseudo-continuous symbol shown in FIG. 15-3 does not temporarily stop.

Next, a display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display for executing the temporary stop suggestion effect in the feature unit 225SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-4.

First, as shown in FIGS. 15-4 (A) to 15-4 (C), after a certain period of time has passed from the start of the variable display, the decorations are displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C. The symbol stops (swing stops) and reaches. After that, as the first temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol moves from the upper side to the lower side in the decorative symbol display area 5C of the "middle". At this time, as shown in FIGS. 15-4 (C) to 15-4 (E), in the image display device 5, the pseudo-continuous symbol is moved toward the center of the image display device 5. Then, the concentrated line is moved and displayed toward the central portion of the image display device 5.

Then, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (F). The concentrated line is hidden, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is continuously moved downward of the image display device without being temporarily stopped and is hidden.

On the other hand, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 15-4 (G) and 15-4 (H), the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. An effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. Since the transmittance of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0% as described above, the player can use the effect for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period elapses from the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The pseudo-continuous pattern is invisible due to the image. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol, the player can visually recognize the pseudo-continuous symbol having a size larger than that during the temporary stop notification effect by hiding the effect image for the temporary stop notification. It will be possible.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 225SG, the pseudo-continuous symbol is moved and displayed toward the central portion of the image display device 5 during the variable display of 1, and it is suggested that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. It is possible to execute a stop suggestion effect. Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the effect of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. If the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stopped by Since it is continuously moved and displayed downward of the display device 5 and then hidden, the player succeeds in producing the temporary stop suggestion effect (temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol) and fails in the effect (the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop). ) Is easy to understand, and it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion production.

Further, during the temporary stop suggestion effect, the image display device 5 displays a concentrated line having a high transmittance, so that the player pays attention to whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol that is moving and displayed temporarily stops. You can improve your interest. Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the effect image for temporary stop notification having a transmittance of 0 is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby reducing the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop. At the same time, it is possible to emphasize that the pseudo-continuous symbol has been temporarily stopped, so that the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol can be improved.

When the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous symbol at the time of temporary stop is displayed in a size larger than that before the temporary stop (the left-right width dimension before the temporary stop is a and the vertical width dimension is b). On the other hand, since the left-right width dimension at the time of temporary stop is x (x> a) and the vertical width dimension is y (y> b)), the visibility of the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol can be improved and the pseudo-continuous symbol can be improved. The temporary stop can be emphasized more.

In the feature unit 225SG, a mode in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in a size larger than that before the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol is illustrated from the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, but the present invention is limited to this. The timing for displaying the size of the pseudo-pseudo-continuous symbol larger than that before the temporary stop is after the temporary stop, such as the timing immediately before the temporary stop or the timing when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden. It may be timing.

Further, in the feature unit 225SG, the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in a size larger than that before the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol from the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, thereby emphasizing that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and emphasizes that, for example, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped by changing the shape and color of the pseudo-continuous symbol from the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. You may.

Further, in the feature unit 225SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-4 (C) to 15-4 (E), a concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, and a temporary stop suggestion effect is displayed. By moving and displaying the concentrated line toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the progress, the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped is increased, so that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. It is possible to raise the expectation for the movie and improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion production.

In the feature unit 225SG, the concentration line is moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect, thereby increasing the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the color of the concentrated lines is changed and the number of concentrated lines to be displayed is increased according to the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect (increasing the density of the concentrated lines). ) By doing so, the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped may be increased.

Although the feature portion 225SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and even if there are changes or additions within the range not deviating from the gist of the present invention, the present invention includes them. ..

For example, in the feature unit 225SG, as shown in FIG. 15-1, the image display device 5 draws a concentrated line as the image data 2 and draws a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern as the image data 3. An example of a form in which a concentrated line is displayed with priority over a decorative symbol or a pseudo-continuous symbol has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. 15-5 (A) to 15 as a modified example 225SG-1. As shown in −5 (C), by drawing the concentrated line as the image data 4, the image display device 5 displays the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol with priority over the concentrated line (the concentrated line is displayed as a decorative symbol or the like). It may be displayed as an image on the rear side of the pseudo-continuous pattern).

By doing so, as shown in FIGS. 15-6 (A) to 15-6 (H), during the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentrated line in the image display device 5 is centered on the image display device 5. By moving and displaying toward the part, it is possible to increase the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, and the concentrated line makes it difficult for the player to see the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol. You can prevent that.

If the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the effect of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, as shown in FIG. 15-6 (F). The concentrated line is hidden, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is continuously moved downward of the image display device without being temporarily stopped and is hidden.

On the other hand, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 15-6 (G) and 15-6 (H), the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. An effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. Since the transmittance of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0% as described above, the player can use the effect for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period elapses from the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The pseudo-continuous pattern is invisible due to the image. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol, the player can visually recognize the pseudo-continuous symbol having a size larger than that during the temporary stop notification effect by hiding the effect image for the temporary stop notification. It will be possible.

As described above, by displaying the concentrated line as an image on the rear side of the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol, it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops. Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the player's discomfort at the time of the temporary stop can be reduced and the temporary stop can be performed. It is possible to emphasize what has been done, and it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo-ream pattern.

Further, in the modified example 225SG-1, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the effect of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentrated line is hidden and then the pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped in the image display device. Although the embodiment in which the image is continuously moved downward and hidden is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. 15-7 (A) to 15-7 (FIGS. 15-7 (A) to FIGS. 15-7 (A) to FIG. As shown in H), when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the effect of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol is continuously moved downward of the image display device and hidden without being temporarily stopped. On the other hand, the concentrated line may be continuously displayed for a predetermined period up to the stop timing of the variable display even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden.

By doing so, as in the modified example 225SG-1, by displaying the concentrated line as an image on the rear side of the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol, a temporary stop suggestion suggesting that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. You can improve the interest of the production. When the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous symbol is also displayed by continuously displaying the concentrated line for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. It is possible to improve the interest in whether or not to temporarily stop. Although not particularly shown, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the entire display area of the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as in the feature portion 225SG. By displaying the effect image for stop notification, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop.

Further, in the modified example 225SG-2, the decorative symbol and the pseudo-continuous symbol are displayed with priority over the concentrated line during the temporary stop suggestion effect, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped as the effect result of the temporary stop suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, although the embodiment in which the concentrated line is continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5 is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 15-8 (A) to 15-8 (H) as a modified example 225SG-3, the concentrated line is displayed with priority over the decorative symbol and the pseudo-continuous symbol during the temporary stop suggestion effect. If the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentrated line may be continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden on the image display device 5. good.

By doing so, as with the feature portion 225SG, by displaying the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol as an image on the rear side of the concentrated line, a temporary stop suggestion effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. Can improve the interest of. When the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous symbol is also displayed by continuously displaying the concentrated line for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. It is possible to improve the interest in whether or not to temporarily stop. Although not particularly shown, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the entire display area of the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as in the feature portion 225SG. By displaying the effect image for stop notification, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop.

Further, in the feature unit 225SG, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 displays an effect image for temporary stop notification as an image having a transmittance of 0%, and the stopped pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily visually recognized. Although the impossible form has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 225SG-4, as shown in FIGS. 15-9 (A) to 15-9 (C), a pseudo-continuous pattern is used. When is temporarily stopped, the effect image for temporary stop notification may be displayed on the image display device 5 as an image having a transmittance lower than that of the concentrated line (for example, 20% or the like).

That is, as shown in FIG. 15-10, the transmittance of the concentrated line is high (for example, during the period until the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol) when the concentrated line is displayed as the temporary stop suggestion effect (for example). , The above-mentioned 50%) allows the player to easily see the decorative pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern through the concentrated line, while the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed as the temporary stop notification effect (the period (50%). In the period after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol), the transmittance is lower than that of the concentrated line (for example, 20% described above), so that the player can display the decorative symbol or pseudo in the period after the concentrated line is displayed. It may be difficult to visually recognize the continuous pattern.

By doing so, as in the case of the feature portion 225SG, a concentrated line having a relatively high transmittance is displayed during the temporary stop suggestion effect, which suggests that the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops. Can improve the interest of. Then, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as the effect result of the temporary stop suggestion effect (when the temporary stop notification effect is executed), the image display device 5 is used when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as in the feature unit 225SG. By displaying the effect image for the temporary stop notification in the entire display area of, the player's discomfort at the time of the temporary stop can be reduced, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped through the effect image for the temporary stop notification. Since it can be emphasized, it is possible to improve the interest of the pseudo-ream pattern temporarily stopping.

Further, the feature unit 225SG exemplifies a mode in which a temporary stop suggestion effect and a temporary stop notification effect can be executed as an effect related to the pseudo continuous effect during the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. During the variable display, as an effect different from the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification effect, a notice effect (see FIG. 14-29 in the feature unit 193SG) suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit may be executed. .. It should be noted that these advance notice effects can be executed when the concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, while the effect image for temporary stop notification on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. When is displayed, the execution of the advance notice effect may be restricted. By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit by executing the advance notice effect, and the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5. In some cases, by limiting the execution of the advance notice effect, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the advance notice effect from being lowered by the effect image for the temporary stop notification and the interest of the notice effect from being lowered.

Further, as the advance notice effect that can be executed during the variable display, as shown in FIG. 15-11 as the modified example 225SG-5, for example, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as the effect result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the following Pseudo-ream suggestion effect suggesting that the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the pseudo-ream suggestion effect, and variable display being executed at a predetermined position of the image display device 5 (for example, the lower center of the image display device). An active display area 225SG005F for displaying the hold storage display corresponding to the active display as an active display is provided, and an active display notice effect suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the display mode of the active display and the active display are displayed. It may be possible to execute an active display change notice effect that suggests that the display mode changes.

In this way, when the pseudo-ream suggestion effect is executed as the notice effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-11 (A) to 15-11 (C), the pseudo-ream symbol is used as the effect result of the temporary stop notice effect. Displays an image having a left-right width dimension of L1 as a pseudo-continuous suggestion effect on the upper part of the image display device 5 based on the temporary stop, and a temporary stop notification having a transmittance of 0% in the image display device 5. The effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed, and the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden when a predetermined period elapses from the temporary stop. That is, the display of the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is started from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol, but the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is visible to the player only by the effect image for the temporary stop notification. This is from the hidden timing.

On the other hand, when the active display change notice effect is executed as the notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 15-11 (A) and 15-11 (D) to 15-11 (F), the pseudo-continuous symbol is provisionally used. The effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 from the stop timing, and the image of the active display change notice effect (in this modification 225SG-5, from the right part of the image display device 5 to the active display area 225SG005F). An image of an arrow whose left-right width dimension is L2 (L1> L2) is displayed.

When the display mode of the active display changes as a result of the effect of the active display change notice effect, an arrow flying from the right portion of the image display device 5 sticks to the active display as shown in FIG. 15-11 (E). As a result, the display mode of the active display changes, and when the display mode of the active display does not change as a result of the effect of the active display change notice effect, as shown in FIG. 15-11 (F), the image display device 5 It suffices that the arrow flying from the right part passes toward the left part of the image display device 5 without being stuck in the active display and then disappears.

As described above, in the present modification 225SG-5, when the pseudo continuous suggestion effect is executed as the notice effect, the image display device 5 displays the effect image for temporary stop notification together with the image as the pseudo continuous suggestion effect. When the active display change notice effect is executed as the notice effect while the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is once made invisible to the player, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5. By displaying an image (arrow image) whose display size is shorter than the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect as the image of the active display change notice effect, the active display change notice effect is blocked by the effect image for temporary stop notification. It is possible to prevent the image from being obscured.

In the present modification 225SG-5, when the pseudo-ream suggestion effect is executed as the advance notice effect, the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the effect of the temporary stop advance notice effect, and is simulated at the upper part of the image display device 5. An example is illustrated in which an image having a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a continuous suggestion effect, and an effect image for temporary stop notification having a transmittance of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is executed as the advance notice effect, the transmittance is not 0% together with the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect at the upper part of the image display device 5 (for example, the transmittance is not 0%). An effect image for temporary stop notification (20% or 50%) may be displayed.

(Explanation of Feature 225SG in Embodiment of the Present Invention)
Next, the feature portion 225SG (hereinafter, referred to as the present feature portion 225SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. In this feature unit 225SG, the description of the portion having the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature portion described above will be omitted.

First, the display control unit 123 in the feature unit 225SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying an image on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 can display a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on the image data of 1 stored in the CGROM based on the instruction by the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not displayed on the image display device 5, the image of the predetermined image is arranged by arranging other image data on the front side of the image data of the predetermined image with a transparency of 0% depending on the situation. The predetermined image is not displayed on the effect screen by controlling the image based on the data so as not to be displayed on the effect screen and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as such.

As shown in FIGS. 15-1 (A) to 15-1 (C), FIGS. 15-2 (A) to 15-2 (C), and FIGS. 15-3 (A) to 15-3 (C). In addition, for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the display data created by arranging a plurality of image data including the image data 1 to 4. Of these, FIG. 15-1 shows image data immediately before the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops as a temporary stop suggestion effect in the feature unit 225SG, and FIG. 15-2 shows image data when the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops. Yes, FIG. 15-3 is image data when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop.

As shown in FIG. 15-2 (A), the image data 1 is an effect image (temporary stop notification) for notifying that the pseudo-continuous symbol has been temporarily stopped in the entire display area of the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. This is the data drawn to display the effect image).

As shown in FIG. 15-1 (A), the image data 2 is obtained from the outer peripheral edge of the image display device 5 to the central portion of the image display device 5 (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) as a temporary stop suggestion effect. It is the data drawn to display the concentrated line toward.

As shown in FIGS. 15-1 (B), 15-2 (B), and 15-3 (A), the image data 3 displays the pseudo-continuous symbol on the image display device 5 during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. It is data drawn to display the movement display from the upper side to the lower side. Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the size of the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol is larger than that during the moving display (as shown in FIG. 15-1 (B), the left and right of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the temporary stop). The width dimension is a and the vertical width dimension is b. As shown in FIG. 15-2 (B), the horizontal width dimension of the pseudo-continuous symbol at the time of temporary stop is x (x> a), and the vertical width dimension is y. The data is drawn for display in (y> b)), and immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stopping, the image display device 5 replaces the pseudo-continuous symbol with the pseudo-continuous symbol. This is data drawn to display a variable display of a normal decorative symbol (designs "1" to "9" in the feature unit 225SG) from the upper side to the lower side.

As shown in FIG. 15-3 (B), the image data 4 is simulated from the central portion of the image display device 5 downward immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol. This is data drawn to display the moving display of the continuous pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 15-1 to 15-3, display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5 are set in these image data 1 to 4. Image data 1 is set to have the highest display priority. Further, the display priority of the image data 2 is set lower than that of the image data 1, and the display priority of the image data 3 is set lower than that of the image data 2. The display priority of the image data 4 is set to be the lowest (image display priority in the image display device 5: image data 1> image data 2> image data 3> image data 4). That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as an image lower than the image based on the image data 1, and is based on the image data 3. The image is displayed as an image lower than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2, and the image based on the image data 4 is based on the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2 and the image data 3. It is displayed as an image below the image.

Therefore, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 15-1 (C), the image (concentrated line) based on the image data 2 is changed to the image based on the image data 3 (from above to below the pseudo-continuous symbol). It is displayed with priority over (moving display toward). Since the concentrated line in the feature unit 225SG is set to have a high transmittance (for example, 50%), the player can draw a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern through the concentrated line during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. It is visible.

Immediately after the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIGS. 15-2 (C) and 15-2 (D), the image based on the image data 1 (effect image for temporary stop notification) is the image data 3. It is displayed with priority over the image based on (a pseudo-continuous pattern whose size is larger than that during the moving display due to the temporary stop). The effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden when a predetermined period elapses before the start of the revariable display.

The transmittance of the effect image for temporary stop notification in the feature unit 225SG is set to 0%. That is, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIGS. 15-2 (C) and 15-2 (D), the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. As a result, the decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols become invisible to the player, but after a predetermined period of time, these decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols become visible to the player.

Immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stopping, as shown in FIG. 15-3 (C), the image based on the image data 3 (variable display of the decorative symbol different from the pseudo-continuous symbol). ) Is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 4 (moving display from the center of the pseudo-continuous pattern image display device 5 downward).

In particular, in the feature unit 225SG, during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. 15-1 on the image display device 5, thereby performing a pseudo-ream. The player is made to pay attention to whether or not the symbol is temporarily stopped.

Further, in the variable display for executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) temporarily stops the pseudo-continuous symbol regardless of whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops at the start timing of the variable display. The image data to be stopped is set and the variable display is executed. Then, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) sets the image display device 5 at the display image data switching timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect in which the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop (see FIG. 14-33 of the above-mentioned feature unit 193). The image data displayed in 1 is switched from the image data (FIGS. 15-1 and 15-2) in which the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops to the image data in which the pseudo-continuous symbol shown in FIG. 15-3 does not temporarily stop.

Next, a display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display for executing the temporary stop suggestion effect in the feature unit 225SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-4.

First, as shown in FIGS. 15-4 (A) to 15-4 (C), after a certain period of time has passed from the start of the variable display, the decorations are displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C. The symbol stops (swing stops) and reaches. After that, as the first temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol moves from the upper side to the lower side in the decorative symbol display area 5C of the "middle". At this time, as shown in FIGS. 15-4 (C) to 15-4 (E), in the image display device 5, the pseudo-continuous symbol is moved toward the center of the image display device 5. Then, the concentrated line is moved and displayed toward the central portion of the image display device 5.

Then, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (F). The concentrated line is hidden, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is continuously moved downward of the image display device without being temporarily stopped and is hidden.

On the other hand, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 15-4 (G) and 15-4 (H), the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. An effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. Since the transmittance of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0% as described above, the player can use the effect for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period elapses from the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The pseudo-continuous pattern is invisible due to the image. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol, the player can visually recognize the pseudo-continuous symbol having a size larger than that during the temporary stop notification effect by hiding the effect image for the temporary stop notification. It will be possible.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 225SG, the pseudo-continuous symbol is moved and displayed toward the central portion of the image display device 5 during the variable display of 1, and it is suggested that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. It is possible to execute a stop suggestion effect. Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the effect of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. If the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stopped by Since it is continuously moved and displayed downward of the display device 5 and then hidden, the player succeeds in producing the temporary stop suggestion effect (temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol) and fails in the effect (the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop). ) Is easy to understand, and it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion production.

Further, during the temporary stop suggestion effect, the image display device 5 displays a concentrated line having a high transmittance, so that the player pays attention to whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol that is moving and displayed temporarily stops. You can improve your interest. Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the effect image for temporary stop notification having a transmittance of 0 is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby reducing the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop. At the same time, it is possible to emphasize that the pseudo-continuous symbol has been temporarily stopped, so that the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol can be improved.

When the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous symbol at the time of temporary stop is displayed in a size larger than that before the temporary stop (the left-right width dimension before the temporary stop is a and the vertical width dimension is b). On the other hand, since the left-right width dimension at the time of temporary stop is x (x> a) and the vertical width dimension is y (y> b)), the visibility of the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol can be improved and the pseudo-continuous symbol can be improved. The temporary stop can be emphasized more.

In the feature unit 225SG, a mode in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in a size larger than that before the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol is illustrated from the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, but the present invention is limited to this. The timing for displaying the size of the pseudo-pseudo-continuous symbol larger than that before the temporary stop is after the temporary stop, such as the timing immediately before the temporary stop or the timing when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden. It may be timing.

Further, in the feature unit 225SG, the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in a size larger than that before the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol from the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, thereby emphasizing that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and emphasizes that, for example, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped by changing the shape and color of the pseudo-continuous symbol from the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. You may.

Further, in the feature unit 225SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-4 (C) to 15-4 (E), a concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, and a temporary stop suggestion effect is displayed. By moving and displaying the concentrated line toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the progress, the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped is increased, so that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. It is possible to raise the expectation for the movie and improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion production.

In the feature unit 225SG, the concentration line is moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect, thereby increasing the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the color of the concentrated lines is changed and the number of concentrated lines to be displayed is increased according to the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect (increasing the density of the concentrated lines). ) By doing so, the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped may be increased.

Although the feature portion 225SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and even if there are changes or additions within the range not deviating from the gist of the present invention, the present invention includes them. ..

For example, in the feature unit 225SG, as shown in FIG. 15-1, the image display device 5 draws a concentrated line as the image data 2 and draws a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern as the image data 3. An example of a form in which a concentrated line is displayed with priority over a decorative symbol or a pseudo-continuous symbol has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. 15-5 (A) to 15 as a modified example 225SG-1. As shown in −5 (C), by drawing the concentrated line as the image data 4, the image display device 5 displays the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol with priority over the concentrated line (the concentrated line is displayed as a decorative symbol or the like). It may be displayed as an image on the rear side of the pseudo-continuous pattern).

By doing so, as shown in FIGS. 15-6 (A) to 15-6 (H), during the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentrated line in the image display device 5 is centered on the image display device 5. By moving and displaying toward the part, it is possible to increase the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, and the concentrated line makes it difficult for the player to see the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol. You can prevent that.

If the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the effect of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, as shown in FIG. 15-6 (F). The concentrated line is hidden, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is continuously moved downward of the image display device without being temporarily stopped and is hidden.

On the other hand, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 15-6 (G) and 15-6 (H), the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. An effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. Since the transmittance of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0% as described above, the player can use the effect for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period elapses from the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The pseudo-continuous pattern is invisible due to the image. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol, the player can visually recognize the pseudo-continuous symbol having a size larger than that during the temporary stop notification effect by hiding the effect image for the temporary stop notification. It will be possible.

As described above, by displaying the concentrated line as an image on the rear side of the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol, it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops. Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the player's discomfort at the time of the temporary stop can be reduced and the temporary stop can be performed. It is possible to emphasize what has been done, and it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo-ream pattern.

Further, in the modified example 225SG-1, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the effect of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentrated line is hidden and then the pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped in the image display device. Although the embodiment in which the image is continuously moved downward and hidden is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. 15-7 (A) to 15-7 (FIGS. 15-7 (A) to FIGS. 15-7 (A) to FIG. As shown in H), when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the effect of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol is continuously moved downward of the image display device and hidden without being temporarily stopped. On the other hand, the concentrated line may be continuously displayed for a predetermined period up to the stop timing of the variable display even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden.

By doing so, as in the modified example 225SG-1, by displaying the concentrated line as an image on the rear side of the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol, a temporary stop suggestion suggesting that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. You can improve the interest of the production. When the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous symbol is also displayed by continuously displaying the concentrated line for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. It is possible to improve the interest in whether or not to temporarily stop. Although not particularly shown, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the entire display area of the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as in the feature portion 225SG. By displaying the effect image for stop notification, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop.

Further, in the modified example 225SG-2, the decorative symbol and the pseudo-continuous symbol are displayed with priority over the concentrated line during the temporary stop suggestion effect, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped as the effect result of the temporary stop suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, although the embodiment in which the concentrated line is continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5 is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 15-8 (A) to 15-8 (H) as a modified example 225SG-3, the concentrated line is displayed with priority over the decorative symbol and the pseudo-continuous symbol during the temporary stop suggestion effect. If the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentrated line may be continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden on the image display device 5. good.

By doing so, as with the feature portion 225SG, by displaying the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol as an image on the rear side of the concentrated line, a temporary stop suggestion effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. Can improve the interest of. When the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous symbol is also displayed by continuously displaying the concentrated line for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. It is possible to improve the interest in whether or not to temporarily stop. Although not particularly shown, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the entire display area of the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as in the feature portion 225SG. By displaying the effect image for stop notification, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop.

Further, in the feature unit 225SG, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 displays an effect image for temporary stop notification as an image having a transmittance of 0%, and the stopped pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily visually recognized. Although the impossible form has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 225SG-4, as shown in FIGS. 15-9 (A) to 15-9 (C), a pseudo-continuous pattern is used. When is temporarily stopped, the effect image for temporary stop notification may be displayed on the image display device 5 as an image having a transmittance lower than that of the concentrated line (for example, 20% or the like).

That is, as shown in FIG. 15-10, the transmittance of the concentrated line is high (for example, during the period until the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol) when the concentrated line is displayed as the temporary stop suggestion effect (for example). , The above-mentioned 50%) allows the player to easily see the decorative pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern through the concentrated line, while the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed as the temporary stop notification effect (the period (50%). In the period after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol), the transmittance is lower than that of the concentrated line (for example, 20% described above), so that the player can display the decorative symbol or pseudo in the period after the concentrated line is displayed. It may be difficult to visually recognize the continuous pattern. Although not particularly shown in this modification 225SG-4, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the image display device 5 notifies the temporary stop as in the case of other feature portions and modification examples. The effect image for is not displayed.

By doing so, as in the case of the feature portion 225SG, a concentrated line having a relatively high transmittance is displayed during the temporary stop suggestion effect, which suggests that the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops. Can improve the interest of. Then, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as the effect result of the temporary stop suggestion effect (when the temporary stop notification effect is executed), the image display device 5 is used when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as in the feature unit 225SG. By displaying the effect image for the temporary stop notification in the entire display area of, the player's discomfort at the time of the temporary stop can be reduced, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped through the effect image for the temporary stop notification. Since it can be emphasized, it is possible to improve the interest of the pseudo-ream pattern temporarily stopping.

Further, the feature unit 225SG exemplifies a mode in which a temporary stop suggestion effect and a temporary stop notification effect can be executed as an effect related to the pseudo continuous effect during the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modification 225SG-5, a notice effect suggesting that the variable display result is a big hit as an effect different from the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification effect during the variable display (see FIG. 14-29 in the feature unit 193SG). ) May be executable. It should be noted that these advance notice effects can be executed when the concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, while the effect image for temporary stop notification on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. When is displayed, the execution of the advance notice effect may be restricted. By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit by executing the advance notice effect, and the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5. In some cases, by limiting the execution of the advance notice effect, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the advance notice effect from being lowered by the effect image for the temporary stop notification and the interest of the notice effect from being lowered.

Further, as the advance notice effect that can be executed during the variable display, as shown in FIG. 15-11 as the modified example 225SG-5, for example, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as the effect result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the following Pseudo-ream suggestion effect suggesting that the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the pseudo-ream suggestion effect, and variable display being executed at a predetermined position of the image display device 5 (for example, the lower center of the image display device). An active display area 225SG005F for displaying the hold storage display corresponding to the active display as an active display is provided, and an active display notice effect suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the display mode of the active display and the active display are displayed. It may be possible to execute an active display change notice effect that suggests that the display mode changes.

In this way, when the pseudo-ream suggestion effect is executed as the notice effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-11 (A) to 15-11 (C), the pseudo-ream symbol is used as the effect result of the temporary stop notice effect. Displays an image having a left-right width dimension of L1 as a pseudo-continuous suggestion effect on the upper part of the image display device 5 based on the temporary stop, and a temporary stop notification having a transmittance of 0% in the image display device 5. The effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed, and the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden when a predetermined period elapses from the temporary stop. That is, the display of the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is started from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol, but the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is visible to the player only by the effect image for the temporary stop notification. This is from the hidden timing.

On the other hand, when the active display change notice effect is executed as the notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 15-11 (A) and 15-11 (D) to 15-11 (F), the pseudo-continuous symbol is provisionally used. The effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 from the stop timing, and the image of the active display change notice effect (in this modification 225SG-5, from the right part of the image display device 5 to the active display area 225SG005F). An image of an arrow whose left-right width dimension is L2 (L1> L2) is displayed.

When the display mode of the active display changes as a result of the effect of the active display change notice effect, an arrow flying from the right portion of the image display device 5 sticks to the active display as shown in FIG. 15-11 (E). As a result, the display mode of the active display changes, and when the display mode of the active display does not change as a result of the effect of the active display change notice effect, as shown in FIG. 15-11 (F), the image display device 5 It suffices that the arrow flying from the right part passes toward the left part of the image display device 5 without being stuck in the active display and then disappears.

As described above, in the present modification 225SG-5, when the pseudo continuous suggestion effect is executed as the notice effect, the image display device 5 displays the effect image for temporary stop notification together with the image as the pseudo continuous suggestion effect. When the active display change notice effect is executed as the notice effect while the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is once made invisible to the player, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5. By displaying an image (arrow image) whose display size is shorter than the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect as the image of the active display change notice effect, the active display change notice effect is blocked by the effect image for temporary stop notification. It is possible to prevent the image from being obscured.

In the present modification 225SG-5, when the pseudo-ream suggestion effect is executed as the advance notice effect, the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the effect of the temporary stop advance notice effect, and is simulated at the upper part of the image display device 5. An example is illustrated in which an image having a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a continuous suggestion effect, and an effect image for temporary stop notification having a transmittance of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is executed as the advance notice effect, the transmittance is not 0% together with the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect at the upper part of the image display device 5 (for example, the transmittance is not 0%). An effect image for temporary stop notification (20% or 50%) may be displayed.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG and the feature unit 225SG, a symbol (pseudo-ream) for notifying that the pseudo-ream effect is executed as one of the plurality of decorative symbols or as a symbol different from the decorative symbol. Although the form in which the symbol) is temporarily stopped in the image display device 5, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, for example, by changing the display mode of the hold storage display or the display mode at the end timing of the variable display. It is possible to execute a hold memory display change effect that suggests that the variable display result corresponding to the hold memory display is a big hit, and as one of a plurality of decorative symbols or as a symbol different from the decorative symbol. , A case may be provided in which the symbol indicating that the hold storage display is changed (hold memory display change notification symbol) is stopped in the image display device 5. When the hold memory display change notification symbol is stopped in the image display device 5 in this way, the temporary stop suggestion in the feature unit 193SG and the feature unit 225SG is targeted for whether or not the hold memory display change notification symbol is stopped. An effect corresponding to the effect (suggested effect in the present invention) may be made feasible.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG and the feature unit 225SG, a symbol (pseudo-ream) for notifying that the pseudo-ream effect is executed as one of the plurality of decorative symbols or as a symbol different from the decorative symbol. The form in which the symbol) is temporarily stopped in the image display device 5 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a plurality of images can be displayed as a background image in the image display device 5 and displayed. It is possible to suggest the ratio of the variable display result being executed to be a big hit according to the background image, and the background image changes as one of a plurality of decorative symbols or as a symbol different from the decorative symbol. A case may be provided in which the symbol (background image change notification symbol) indicating that the image is to be stopped is stopped in the image display device 5. When the background image change notification symbol is stopped in the image display device 5 in this way, it is used as a temporary stop suggestion effect in the feature unit 193SG and the feature unit 225SG, depending on whether or not the background image change notification symbol is stopped. The corresponding effect (suggested effect in the present invention) may be feasible.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified as a game machine that plays a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game machine that plays a predetermined game is at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine or a general game machine may be used as long as it performs the above.

Further, in the present specification, a plurality of feature portions and modified examples are illustrated as the form of the gaming machine of the present invention, but the gaming machine of the present invention may be implemented by combining these plurality of feature portions and modified examples. Alternatively, only one feature portion or modification may be carried out.

For example, in the feature unit 193SG and the feature unit 225SG, a symbol (pseudo-ream) for notifying that a pseudo-ream effect is executed as one of a plurality of decorative symbols or as a symbol different from the decorative symbol. The form in which the symbol) is temporarily stopped in the image display device 5 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set by a combination of decorative symbols (stop symbol). An effect (suggestion effect in the present invention) corresponding to the temporary stop suggestion effect in the feature unit 193SG and the feature unit 225SG is executed for the stop of the symbol that can be suggested and suggests that a specific set value is set. It may be possible.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board

Claims (2)

It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display of a plurality of types of effect identification information including specific effect identification information, derive and display the display result, and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means and
A variable winning means that can change the game medium into a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win.
A control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. With
The display means
It is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means.
When the first round game of the plurality of round games is performed, the grant amount display is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. ,
If the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period.
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the specific display is displayed without displaying the predetermined display.
Moreover,
As a variable display, a specific effect capable of executing a specific effect that temporarily stops the specific effect identification information and then resumes the variable display at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result. Directing execution means and
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped, and
A notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that the specific effect identification information has been temporarily stopped, and
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means temporarily reduces the visibility of the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the first low visibility. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to the second low visibility state, which is even lower than the state.
As the notification effect, the notification effect execution means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information invisible.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. Can be displayed continuously,
A gaming machine characterized by that. It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display of multiple types of effect identification information, derive and display the display results, and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means and
A variable winning means that can change the game medium into a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win.
A control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state a plurality of times when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. With
The display means
It is possible to display the grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the game value given by the game medium winning the variable winning means.
When the first round game of the plurality of round games is performed, the grant amount display is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. ,
If the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the grant amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period.
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the specific display is displayed without displaying the predetermined display.
Moreover,
As a variable display, at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result, the special identification information different from the effect identification information is temporarily stopped and then the variable display is restarted. Specific production execution means that can execute production,
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the special identification information is temporarily stopped, and
A notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that the special identification information has been temporarily stopped, and
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means once reduces the visibility of the effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the visibility is further improved as compared with the first low visibility state. It is possible to perform the effect of lowering to the low second low visibility state.
The notification effect execution means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is continued for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. Can be displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images